city of guelph transit terminal renovationguelph.ca/wp-content/uploads/13-146_specs_volume-2.pdf ·...

PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2

Issued for Bid

City of Guelph Transit Terminal Renovation 79 Carden Street

Guelph, Ontario N1H 3A4

Thomas Brown Architects Inc. 394 King Street East

Toronto, Ontario M5A 1K9

Tel: 416-364-5710 Fax: 416-364-4662

Project No. 1008

October 15, 2013

Guelph Transit Station Section 15010 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 23 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Mechanical General Requirements

JAL NO. 11-168

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. .2 Unless specified otherwise, this Section shall apply to all Sections of Division 15. 1.2 TENDERS .1 Submit tender based on specified described equipment or Alternates listed. See

attached Supplementary Tender Form and comply with same. 1.3 SUBTRADES .1 Subcontractors named at the time of Tender or substitutions authorized by the

Owner will be recognized as being in accordance with the Contract and any payments will be approved by the Owner, only to such Subcontractors.

.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall employ those subcontractors proposed in the

Mechanical Form(s) of Tender and accepted by the Owner at the signing of the Contract with the General Contractor.

.3 The Owner may, for reasonable cause object to the use of a proposed

Subcontractor and consequently, may require the Mechanical Contractor to employ one of the other Subcontractor bidders.

.4 In the event that the Owner requires a change from a proposed Subcontractor

originally proposed by the Mechanical Contractor, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost.

.5 The Mechanical Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor, a

firm to whom he may reasonably object. 1.4 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and

practice. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade.


JAL NO. 11-168

1.5 DRAWINGS .1 Mechanical drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information

involving accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to runs of piping, ducts or equipment locations to accommodate structural conditions. Location of piping, ducts, controls and equipment may be altered by Architect without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material. Do not scale drawings.

.2 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not coordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge. .3 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and

assistance in connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

.4 Before commencing work, check and verify all sizes, locations, materials,

elevations, levels and dimensions to ensure proper and correct installation. Verify existing and municipal services.

1.6 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE .1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required

to complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.7 PROTECTION .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of pipes, ducts or equipment to prevent entry of

dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all piping, ducting and equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean

at all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts. Protect all bearings and motors from damage due to moisture and dust. Equipment not yet in operation shall be turned over at least at monthly intervals to prevent bearing deterioration.

.3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to

prevent movement.


JAL NO. 11-168

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and

clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract

Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall

check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.4 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection

and after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant in the following form:

- One (1) set of clean, legible prints. - One (1) ACAD 2000 format drawings.

.5 Upon review by Consultant, if required the Contractor shall revise drawings until

acceptable. 1.9 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR .1 Instruct Building Operators in repair, maintenance and operation of Mechanical

Systems and associated equipment. .2 Supply two sets of full Operation and Maintenance Instructions each in stiff cover,

three-ring binder suitably indexed, separated and labeled. Operate each item of equipment in presence of Operators to ensure understanding of working parts and function of each item of equipment. Supply one complete set of "Reviewed" Shop Drawings in separate hard cover binder suitably separated and labeled for the Owner's use.

.3 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be carefully prepared in co-operation

with equipment manufacturers and include miscellaneous parts necessary for proper, efficient operation of all equipment; and shall ALSO identify routine maintenance required on all items.


JAL NO. 11-168

1.10 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or

methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated: and, performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment, and incidentals for mechanical work, Division #15.

.2 Where used, words "Section" and "Division" shall also include other

Subcontractors engaged on site to perform work to make building and site complete in all respects.

.3 Where used, word "supply" shall mean furnishing to site in location required or

directed complete with accessory parts. .4 Where used, word "install" shall mean secured in place and connected up for

operation as noted or directed. .5 Where used, word "provide" shall mean supply and install as each is described

above. .6 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted,

permission, accepted, acceptance, report to", shall mean "approved, directed, permitted, accepted, report to", by the Consultant.

1.11 ALTERNATES & SUBSTITUTIONS .1 Throughout Division 15 are lists of "Alternate Equipment" manufacturers

acceptable to Consultant if their product meets characteristics of specified described equipment. See attached Supplementary Tender Form and comply with same.

.2 Each Bidder may elect to use "Alternate Equipment" from lists of Alternates where

listed. Include for any additional costs to suit Alternates used. Prices are not required in Tender for Alternates listed except where specifically noted as "Separate Price".

.3 It is responsibility of this Division to ensure "Alternate Equipment" fits space

allotted and gives performance specified. If an "Alternate Equipment" unit is proposed and does not fit space allotted nor equal specified product in Consultant's opinion, supply of specified described equipment will be required without change in Contract amount. Only manufacturers listed will be accepted for their product listing. All other manufacturers shall be quoted as substitution stating conditions and credit amount.


JAL NO. 11-168

.4 It item of material specified is unobtainable, state in Tender proposed substitute

and amount added or deducted for its use. Extra monies will not be paid for substitutions after Contract has been awarded.

.5 If pipe or item, of size or weight indicated, is unobtainable, supply next larger size

or heavier weight without additional charge. 1.12 BYLAWS & PERMITS .1 Obey Government, Municipal and Underwriters Standards and perform work in

accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force where building is located.

.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits and inspections required by authorities

having jurisdiction. Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms with laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Make minor changes required by By-Laws and Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction without extra payment.

.3 Plumbing and Heating permits form part of Building Permit. Costs of these permits

will be paid for as part of overall Building Permit and are not chargeable to this Division.

1.13 CO-OPERATION & CO-ORDINATION .1 Each Section and Trade shall:

.1 Confer with other Sections and arrange work so it will be carried on in best interests of all concerned bearing in mind building construction and finish required.

.2 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

.3 Proceed as quickly as practical so that construction may be complete in shortest possible time.


JAL NO. 11-168

1.14 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE .1 Temporary or trial usage of may mechanical device, machinery, apparatus,

equipment or materials shall not be constructed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be used.

1.15 LIABILITY .1 Each Section and Trade shall:

.1 Assume full responsibility for laying out his work and for any damage caused to other Sections by improper location or carrying out of same.

.2 Be responsible for prompt installation of work in advance of concrete pouring, ceiling installation or similar work.

.3 Protect finish and unfinished work of this Division and work of other Sections from damage due to work of this Division.

.4 Be responsible for condition of material and equipment supplied. Be responsible for protection and maintenance of work completed until termination and acceptance.

1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review within 30 days of Contract award, 9 copies of Shop Drawings

and Room Equipment Schedules covering material to be supplied. .2 Each Shop Drawing must be certified correct by submitting trade before

submission. Shop Drawings not so certified will be rejected. .3 Submit Shop Drawings for review for accordance with Division 1. Make printed

submissions of more than two pages in booklet form. Failure to conform may cause undue delay in approvals.

.4 Review of Shop Drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with

general design concept. This review shall not mean that Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents.

Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at site, for

information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of work of all trades.


JAL NO. 11-168

.5 Shop drawings shall have manufacturers names, or supplier's name complete with phone numbers and names of contacts, catalogue model numbers, name of trade supplying same, identification number, all pertinent selection criteria such as air flow, noise, heat input/output, etc. otherwise they shall be returned.

.6 The contractor shall not have equipment delivered to site until a shop drawing for

the item has been reviewed and approved. .7 Equipment layout drawn to scale including piping accessories to show clearance

for operating and servicing for:

.1 Pumps including pump characteristics curves;

.2 Plumbing fixtures, cuts, trim and fittings roughing dimensions;

.3 Floor drain and roof drain details;

.4 Fan with performance curves stating air quantities, external static pressures, outlet velocities, top speeds, fan rpm, discharge arrangement, class construction weights and all motor data;

.5 Air Handling units and their control systems;

.6 Louvres, grilles, registers and diffusers;

.7 Temperature Controls. .8 In addition, electric wiring diagrams, control panel boards, motor test data, motor

starters and controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by Mechanical trades must also be included, for such items as:

.1 Radiation units, wall fins, convectors. 1.17 CODES AND STANDARDS .1 Installation must comply with latest editions and all amendments of the following

codes and standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur the higher standards will apply:

.1 Ontario Building Code; .2 Canadian Standards Association; .3 Canadian Gas Association; .4 National Building Code of Canada; .5 The Building Code (Ontario); .6 All governing municipal requirements; .7 Canadian Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Code; .8 Canadian Plumbing Code; .9 Regulation 815/84 respecting plumbing made in the Ontario Water Resources Act;


JAL NO. 11-168

.10 Section 41 and 42, regarding provision of sewers and water mains, Ontario Regulation 54/76, the Ontario Water Resources Act;

.11 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada Standards;

.12 Ontario Electrical Codes;

.13 Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act;

.14 Conservation Authority;

.15 Ministry of the Environment;

.16 National Standards of Canada;

.17 Canadian General Standards Board;

.18 American National Standards Institute;

.19 American Society of Testing and Materials;

.20 Local Fire Codes;

.21 Provincial Ministry of Labour 1.15 WARRANTY .1 Furnish to the Owner through General Contractor and Consultant, written warranty

covering materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of substantial performance.

.2 Warrant apparatus installed to properly operate, cool, heat and ventilate without

undue noise through every item of equipment and system and to maintain required room conditions.

.3 Warranty shall entail repair or replacement of materials installed without charge to

the Owner except where, in opinion of Consultant, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of proper maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Electrically operated equipment shall be C.S.A. approved and bear approval label.

Special Inspection label of Ontario Hydro will be accepted in lieu of C.S.A. approval label.

.2 Electrically operated equipment, starters and controls shall be rated for satisfactory

operation on following nominal voltages unless otherwise noted: Up to and including 0.25 kw - 60/1/120 V 0.37 kw and larger - 60/3/208 V or as noted


JAL NO. 11-168

.3 Verify characteristics of all electrical components with Electrical Division before submitting Shop Drawings for processing.

.4 Electrical interlocks and control devices shall operate on 120 volts A.C. maximum.

Provide necessary fused and grounded control transformer to suit as necessary. All control circuits shall be fused and grounded.

.5 Unless otherwise noted motors shall be O.P.D. shielded ball bearing, EEMAC

Specification MG-1, Design B, 1.15 service factor, Class 130 of Canadian Manufacture with local service available, be rated for satisfactory operation on noted utilization voltages and bear proper nameplate. Electric motor operated equipment shall have motor sized to bring unit to full operating r/s in ten seconds unless unit is equipped with integral thermal device to prevent motor burnout. Motors shall be 30 r/s synchronous unless otherwise noted.

2.2 MOTOR STARTERS & CONTROLS .1 Mechanical Division 15 shall provide all motor starters and associated controls

required and as scheduled on drawings and noted for Division 15 equipment. Starters and controls shall be Canadian General Electric or Alternate noted. All starters, contactors, thermal overloads, etc. must be EEMAC rated. All starters shall be of one manufacturer except as specifically approved otherwise for integral pre-wired assemblies.

.2 Starter and control units shall be equipped with necessary number of auxiliary

contacts and relays to provide control sequences described in Mechanical Equipment Starter Schedule on Drawings. Auxiliary contacts shall be interchangeable normally open or normally closed, by conversion in field without additional parts exterior to starter.

.3 Manual starters may only be provided for single phase equipment operated by

control device such as thermostat or limit control when such control device is rated for full electrical load of equipment.

.4 Manual starters provided for single phase equipment actuated by electric timer or

shall have H.O.A. feature. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of time switch. Where such units also have protective device (e.g. firestat) such device shall be wired into both "Hand" and "Auto" positions and shall not be shunted.

.5 Manual starters may only be provided for three phase equipment which is not

actuated by pilot control device (pressure switch, float switch, safety limit devices, remote manual control device) unless otherwise noted in Starter Schedule.

.6 Magnetic starters for manually operated equipment shall have "On/Off" selector

switch or "Start-Stop" pushbutton in cover as scheduled.


JAL NO. 11-168

.7 Magnetic starters which are started automatically by electric time switch shall

include "Hand-Off-Automatic" (H.O.A.) selector switch. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of time switch or E.M.S. Where such units also have protective pilot device (e.g. firestat) such device shall be wired into both "Hand" and "Auto" position and shall not be shunted.

.8 Magnetic starters which are started automatically by remote pilot device (or

interlocked units) such as level controller, pressure switch, thermostat or flow switch shall include "Hand-off-Auto" (H.O.A.) selector switch, and, where scheduled, a "Test" pushbutton. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of remote pilot device and thereby permit operation of starter but only while depressing "Test" button.

.9 Equip starter apparatus for prime plumbing, heating, air conditioning and

ventilating equipment so that these units will automatically restart on resumption of power after power outage. Starters for these units shall have "On/Off" selector switch in cover if not fitted with H.O.A. selector feature or manual starter or otherwise noted.

.10 Safety control device such as flow switches, pressure switches, high and low

limited ("Fire" and "Freeze") shall not be shunted by "Hand" position of switch. .11 Manual motor starter shall be toggle operated with following general construction

features:

- Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contracts. - Overload protection heaters, one per phase and speed. - Enclosure to suit application. - Pilot light, neon lamp. - Cover engraved with "On-Trip-Off".

.12 Magnetic motor starters shall comprise electrically-operated motor starters

combined with disconnect switch with following general construction features:

- Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contacts. - Fuse holders to accept specified fuses, one per phase. - Adjustable overload relays, one per phase. - CEMA listed enclosure to suit application. Disconnect with mechanical

cover interlocks, line side barriers and switch operated electrical interlocks to disconnect external control voltage unless starter includes suitable approved enclosed contacts and connections.

- "Reset" button. - Pilot Lights of transformer type incandescent with amber safety lens cap.


JAL NO. 11-168

- Control transformer with 120 volt fused secondary and sized to suit current rating of associated control devices.

- Scheduled cover mounted control devices with standard duty double break contact blocks.

- Minimum of two auxiliary contacts (unused "Seal-in" contact may be included).

.13 Contactors for non-motor applications shall be built similar to combination

magnetic starters, except less overload relays, and with Gould Shawmut AJT time delay HRC1-J fuses, rated for load, and with enclosed continuous current rating of at least 125% of connected full load.

.14 "Double Voltage Relays" shall be CGE Model CR120 LXMC with general purpose

enclosure, number of contacts required and "Mylar" shroud of enclosure of contacts, or approved equivalent.

.15 Pilot devices such as "Start-Stop" pushbuttons, "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches

and indicating lights shall be of heavy-duty construction. Indicating lamps shall be transformer type incandescent with amber safety lens caps.

.16 Each control unit shall be provided with engraved nameplates for designation of

device controlled and duty. See Subsection "Equipment Markers & Nameplates" for details.

.17 Control wiring shall be 120 volt A.C. maximum. Provide control circuit transformers

where these are not included in motor starters. Secondaries of control transformers shall be fused with one side grounded and controls, safety devices and interlocks shall be connected in ungrounded conductor, excepting only integral starter overload devices.

.18 Single phase motors interlocked to start or operate with other equipment shall be

provided with magnetic starters or suitable relays with necessary auxiliary contacts and double voltage relays or be otherwise electrically separated.

.19 Overload relay heaters for starters shall be selected and field adjusted to trip at

maximum value of 115% of actual nameplate full load amperes. Selection of heater elements shall be based on starter manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain data from Mechanical Division. Submit Motor Starter Schedule which shall list following for each motor:

- Proposed equipment nameplate data - Actual full load amperes of motor - Speed of motor - Temperature Class in degrees Celsius rise and insulation class. - Circuit breaker or fuse type and proposed rating


JAL NO. 11-168

- Type of motor, duty and service factor. .20 Overload relay heaters shall trip in 20 seconds or less from cold or motor-locked

rotar condition. .21 Where equipment is noted to be electrically interlocked, provide necessary

interlocks, double voltage relays (Mylar shroud accepted) to provide specified operation.

.22 Provide all fuses required to protect equipment. Fuses shall be proper size blade

type time delay HRC1-J current limiting. Supply three spare fuses of each size and type and obtain duplicate receipt for same. Fuse clips shall reject standard NEC fuses. Fuses shall be rated in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Fuses to be of one manufacturer throughout.

.23 Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers

1. Furnas Electric 2. Westinghouse 3. Allen Bradley 4. Square `D' 5. Cutler Hammer 6. Klockner-Moeller. 7. Commander 8. Telemecanique

2.3 HANGERS .1 Pipe hangers shall be Myatt or Grinnell equal as follows:

.1 For horizontal ceiling supported: Myatt #124 split clevis or Grinnell #260. .2 For horizontal wall supported: Myatt #157 offset wall. .3 For vertical piping: Myatt #182 riser clamp or Grinnell #261. .4 For insulation shield: Myatt #251 galvanized steel or Grinnel #167.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS .1 Supply as required, 12 gauge hinged metal access doors with frames for

installation by other Sections in walls or ceilings to permit access to built-in or unaccessible controls, dampers, valves, cleanouts and components.


JAL NO. 11-168

.2 Access doors shall be Stelpro Ltd. #722 flush type of size to suit controls, valves, cleanouts, dampers or components serviced, minimum size 300 x 300 mm "Reach-In", 300 x 600 mm "Crawl-In", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings and #704 in drywall ceilings.

.3 Access doors in fire rated walls, duct shafts or in corridor walls shall be UL, ULC or

WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010, Nailor Hart #0900 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shafts or in

corridor walls shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010, Nailor Hart #0900 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.5 Alternate Equipment:

1. Smille, McAdams & Summerline Ltd. 2. Mifab (Modular Equipment Mfg. Inc.) 3. Can-Aqua Inc. 4. Acudor Products Ltd. 5. LeHage (Ancon Industries Ltd.) 6. Nailor Hart Industries Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Instruct and supervise other Sections doing related work. Co-ordinate all work

between this Division and their relationship to all other Sections. Supply measurement of equipment to other Sections to allow for necessary openings to be left in work of other Sections.

.2 Install all work and equipment to manufacturer's printed directions. .3 Install furred-in work neatly and close to building structure so furring will be as

small as practical. .4 Supply measurements of equipment, duct openings and recesses to other

Sections to allow for necessary openings to be left in work of other Sections for work of this Division.


JAL NO. 11-168

.5 Install pipes and ducts to clear structural members and any fireproofing. Locate mechanical work to permit installation of specified insulation. Do not remove or damage structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit fireproofing and insulation to be inspected and repaired.

.6 Install work in advance of concrete pouring, ceiling installation, furring or similar

work. .7 Mechanical drawings indicate general location of route of pipes and ducts which

are to be installed. Where required work is not shown or only shown diagrammatically, install same to conserve head room (minimum 2200 mm clear) and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass.

.8 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not coordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge. .9 Where lift-out acoustic board ceilings are used for access to components in ceiling

space, boards shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Bildemup #6RH brass paper fasteners inserted through boards and bent over. Paint heads with red enamel before installation.

.10 As work progresses and before installing heating units, registers, diffusers, fixtures

and other fittings and equipment which may interfere with interior treatment and use of building, obtain detail drawings or directions for exact location of such equipment and fittments.

.11 Locate all mechanical and electrical equipment in such a manner as to facilitate

easy and safe access to and maintenance and replacement of any part. .12 In every place where there is indicated space reserved for future or other

equipment, leave such space clear, and install piping and other work so that necessary installation and connections can be made for any such apparatus. Obtain instructions wherever necessary for this purpose.

3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK .1 Electric connections and wiring for equipment supplied under Mechanical Division

will be by Electrical Division except for Temperature Controls System, Mechanical Firing Equipment, and where otherwise noted. Provide electric wiring to complete all systems. All electrical work must conform to conditions noted in Electrical Division and be concealed except in service areas. All wiring MUST be in conduit or EMT using #18 wire for 24 volt or less, #14 wire for 120 volt control and #12 wire for 120 volt power wiring. Use wiremold where exposed in finished areas.


JAL NO. 11-168

.2 Supply necessary Shop Drawings of powered equipment to Electrical Division. Arrange piping, ductwork and equipment to permit access to and mounting of starters and controls. Co-operate with Electrical Division to ensure electrical equipment can be installed and serviced. See Electrical Drawings.

.3 Control and operation of motors shall be in accordance with diagrams included in

Electrical Division. Mechanical Division shall co-ordinate and confirm control functions supplying appropriate wiring diagrams as may be necessary.

3.3 CUTTING & PATCHING .1 Lay out and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all

costs resulting from failing to comply with this requirement. .2 Core drill holes up to 200 mm diameter (150 mm pipe) in concrete walls and floors

for piping where not previously sleeved. Do not use mechanical hammers or drills without prior approval in writing. Neatly patch holes to approval and where located in exterior walls above grade, make watertight. Make holes in walls below grade with due provision for pipe movement (min. 50 mm clear all around), fill with 50 mm thick fiberglass blanket insulation and seal watertight with mastic.

.3 Layout cutting and patching for approval before starting and obtain approval of

finished work. .4 See 3.6 Supports, 3.8 Hangers and 3.9 Sleeves, and co-ordinate this work to other

Sections to prevent unnecessary cutting and patching. 3.4 EXCAVATING .1 Perform necessary excavating for work of this Division. Ensure bottoms of

trenches are excavated so that full length of each pipe will be supported on solid bed of undisturbed earth. Build approved concrete pad, solid block or concrete piers properly reinforced under piping below grade where solid undisturbed earth bed is not obtainable to meet Plumbing Code.

.2 Remove excavated materials not used as backfill from site unless otherwise

directed.


JAL NO. 11-168

.3 See Soil Test Report re existing soil conditions. Support all piping on approved earth or other foundation or hangers. Earth support must be minimum 90% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527) compaction and proven such conditions exist. Include for necessary soil tests to verify earth foundation will support drains as required at approximately 2400 mm centres. Provide supports to meeting Plumbing Code, Section 51 including piers where earth foundation or hangers are not acceptable to Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Where permitted by authority having jurisdiction where pipe invert is less than 900

mm below floor elevation steel clevis hangers, steel rods and continuous steel supports from floors at half normal spacing may be used. Paint all buried metal hanger work with 2 coats of Bakelite #110-14.

.5 Provide necessary shoring and support for trenching. Do all work in conformity to

Ontario Trench Excavator's Protection Act and Occupational Health & Safety Act, each as amended to date. Trench widths shall be kept to minimum dimension as directed & approved.

.6 Perform necessary pumping to maintain excavations free of water for work of this

Division until backfill is completed. .7 Provide 100 mm bed of 20 mm crusher run limestone compacted to 98% Modified

Proctor under all piping not laid in sandy ground or other approved bedding. For copper and plastic piping, bedding shall be clean sand.

3.5 BACKFILLING .1 Backfill at least first 150 mm above top of piping with clean coarse sand hand

placed in 75 mm layers and compacted to 98% density Proctor Modified (ASTM #D1527). Note conditions and Details and conform thereto.

.2 Backfill inside building with M.T.C. granular 'B' or clean coarse sand in 150 mm

layers mechanically compacted to give minimum of 98% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527 STD) compaction.

.3 For Landscape Areas: Backfill outside building with approved clean earth in 300

mm layers watered and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor. Do not use clay, rock, frozen earth, rubbish or other unapproved materials. Remove same from site and bring in approved earth or sand for use in this event.

.4 Backfill under all existing, new and future concreted, paved or gravelled areas with

M.T.C granular 'B' placed in 150 mm layers and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor Compaction to level of sub-base of paving or gravel.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.6 SUPPORTS .1 Supply and install supports, stands and platforms necessary for proper installation

of equipment and components, of steel or wood as may be required and as approved or elsewhere shown or specified. Supply and install necessary anchor bolts and other fastenings. Secure work to concrete with Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors.

.2 Concrete housekeeping bases and all required concrete work will be provided by

this Section. 3.7 FLASHINGS .1 Where ducts pass through roof, Another Section will provide suitable curb and

flashing. Supply and install approved counterflashing of same material as flashing. .2 Where equipment is roof mounted, this Section will provide suitable approved

curbs and bases properly flashed and sealed to roof unless otherwise noted. .3 Where plumbing vents and stacks, boiler stacks, or other pipes pass through roof,

provide Thaler series MEF flashings complete with necessary insulation. 3.8 HANGERS .1 Supply and install hangers to support pipes and ducts. Adjust hangers so that

pipes and ducts will be true in respect of alignment and grade. Obtain approval of methods of hanging to building before proceeding. Ensure that load on building structure does not exceed maximum mechanical loading per square foot as directed by Consultant. Take special care to avoid introduction of undue reaction forces into structure of building.

.2 Where structural bearings do not exist, supply and install auxiliary angle or channel

iron of sufficient size from other structural bearings to support hangers or equipment. Do not hang from steel decking.

.3 Do not use wire, chain, strap or extension bar hangers under any circumstances. .4 Do NOT use percussion type fastenings of any kind without prior approval in

writing.


JAL NO. 11-168

.5 Install all work supported from hangers or supports in a manner to ensure that building construction is not weakened or over-stressed, that pipes and ducts are secure, vibration free, free to expand and contract and properly graded, and that vertical adjustment of horizontal pipes and ducts is possible after erection.

.6 Support all hangers directly from building structure only. Do not support pipes,

ducts or equipment from other pipes, ducts or equipment. .7 Support horizontal piping with clevis hangers as follows: Up to 32 mm size - 1800 mm maximum spacing 38 to 75 mm size - 3000 mm maximum spacing 88 mm size and larger - 4300 mm maximum spacing .8 Support plumbing piping in accordance with more stringent requirements of

Plumbing Code or these specifications. .9 Where hangers are grouped, locate spacing by smallest size pipe. Do not use

trapeze type hangers unless specifically shown. Where trapeze hangers are used, fit insulated piping with insulation shields taped to insulation.

.10 Support through vertical piping with riser clamps at each floor level or maximum of

3 metres whichever is shorter. Secure small vertical piping with long ring stays. .11 On copper piping, supply and install approved separation to ensure no contact

between copper and ferrous hanger or other work. Supply and install barrier to prevent copper pipe being in contact with ferrous or cinder materials.

.12 Support hangers with threaded mild steel hangers rods sized in accordance with

hanger manufacturer’s tables. Affix to building structure by coach screw threads into wood construction, inserts into concrete, by beam clamps on to structural steel work, or by bolts or welding. Where inserts are incorrectly placed, Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors may be used.

.13 Support piping on walls with offset wall hooks fastened to wall with toggle bolts or

Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors. .14 Hangers shall be arranged so as to load structural steel in a concentric manner.

Loads shall be imparted either on joist panel points or within 150 mm of panel joint. .15 Rawl Drill Anchors and Rawlys may be used to attach to existing structure sized to

suit load with 5 to 1 safety factor.


JAL NO. 11-168

.16 Support all hangers directly from building structure only. Do not support pipes, ducts or other equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, suspended ceilings or their suspension systems.

.17 Hang new piping for at least 2 support points from isolated equipment with

Burgess-Vibro Acoustics or equal `SH' isolators with steel spring having 25 mm minimum static deflection and series connected elastomer element having static deflection of 6 mm underload.

.18 Where structural steel is to be fireproofed, hangers and attachments MUST be

placed BEFORE fireproofing is installed. Cost of any repair will be charged to Section responsible for same.

3.9 SLEEVES .1 Where pipes pass through masonry walls, supply and install suitable 1.2 mm (18

gauge) galvanized steel sleeves. Size sleeves on insulated pipes to permit insulation to continue through sleeves. Sleeve ductwork similarly.

.2 Where pipes pass through concrete or frame construction, supply and install 1.2

mm (18 gauge) galvanized iron sleeves. Provide copper sleeves on copper pipe. .3 Seal spaces between unburied pipes and ducts through "required" fire

separations" with U.L.C. listed (Guide 40U19) fire stopping including pipe insulation. Fire stopping shall comply with O.B.C., be approved by local Building Department and installed as per listing Card, Firestopping shall have approved FH (hose stream) rating.

.4 Seal all holes and openings through floors water tight. In rooms with mechanical

equipment, sleeves through floors shall be welded water stop flange steel pipe sleeves poured in place and extending at least 100 mm above floor or pipes shall have Corrosion Services Co. Ltd. "Link Seals" installed to manufacturers directions. Where ducts pass through floors, provide 100 mm high by 100 mm concrete curb around ducts sealed to floor. Locate openings in field to be snug around ducts and be responsible for correct size and location.

.5 Sleeves on buried piping shall be 50 mm larger all round than pipe and be filled

with 50 mm thick fiberglass blanket insulation and sealed with mastic.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.10 LEVELS & DIMENSIONS .1 General Contractor, on request, will supply this Division with necessary levels and

dimensions which are required to relate work of the Division to other Sections. Maintain all lines and levels so given and relate this work to work of other Sections.

3.11 PAINTING .1 Supply all equipment and materials fabricated from iron or steel (except ductwork

materials) prime and finish painted at factory before shipment. If damaged, touch up with suitable primer and finish paint. All auxiliary support steel supplied by this Division shall be prime painted with one coat of red oxide primer and finish paint.

.2 All metal parts, miscellaneous metal items and work installed exterior to building

(except aluminum) must be degreased and prime and finish paint unless otherwise noted.

.3 Painting of bare piping, ductwork, insulation and finish painting of equipment will be

done by this Section unless otherwise noted. .4 Consult with Architect about colour of exterior equipment and materials. 3.12 EQUIPMENT MARKERS & NAMEPLATES .1 Attach to each item of equipment (including electric motors), proper manufacturer's

nameplate showing size, model number, serial number, and all information usually provided including voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and name and address of unit manufacturer.

.2 Ensure stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is legible. Nameplates

shall not be painted over and where apparatus is insulated, provide adequate openings in insulation for viewing purposes.

.3 Provide on each item of equipment suitable nameplate. Before nameplates are

made, submit sample and list of names for approval. Make nameplates of 1.6 mm (1/16 ") thick weather resistant rigid laminated plastic with engraved letters on black background. Secure nameplates with drive screws. Make letters on starters, timers and small items at least 5 mm (3/16") high and at least 10 mm (3/8") high on larger units such as fans. Generally, unit nameplates shall conform to those noted in their Schedules.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.13 PIPE IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify exposed service piping at 6 metre intervals and at each valve behind

access panel with service name and flow direction marked on piping using Mystic labels, Westline or Brady "Perma-Code" labels, each applied with #3M clear adhesive. Replace loose or lost labels at end of one year guarantee period without charge. Painted stencil markings are acceptable. Provide similar direction of flow arrows at each label.

3.14 CLEANUP .1 On completion, remove from premises surplus materials and debris resulting from

work of this Division. Keep work areas clean and in a workmanlike manner at all times to approval.

.2 Fill in, compact and level off exterior excavations after final settlement of backfill to

approval. 3.15 VALVE TAGS & CHART .1 Provide on each valve, 25 mm diameter or larger brass tag with punched and

embossed numbers. Valves immediately adjacent to plumbing fixtures or radiation need not be tagged.

.2 Provide where later directed, a neat, glass fronted, framed chart stating number,

location, service and function of each valve and lines controlled. Mount 1800 mm above floor to bottom.

.3 Frame each pressure vessel, H.W. tank and Boiler Certificate under glass and

hang where directed in room where unit is located. Mount 1800 mm above floor to bottom.

.4 Identify exposed service piping at 6 m intervals and at each valve behind access

panel with service name marked on piping using "Mystic" labels (H.A. Scarlett Industries), Westline or Brady "Perma-Code" labels, each applied with #3M clear adhesive. Replace loose or lost labels at end of one year guarantee period without charge. Painted stencil markings are acceptable. Provide direction of flow arrow at each service label.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.16 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION TABLE .1 Pipe Marker Valve Tag Primary Colour Legend Legend City Water CI.W. Green Cold Water C.W. Green Drinking Water Return D.W.R. Green Dom. Hot Water Supply D.H.W.S. Green Dom. Hot Water Return D.H.W.R. Green Make-Up Water M.U.A. Yellow Storm Sewer S.S. Green Sanitary Sewer SAN.S. Green Natural Gas N.G. Yellow Vent (plumbing) V.P. Green Vent V. Yellow 3.17 COLD WEATHER WORK .1 Wherever work is performed in surrounding air temperatures below 4.0oC special

approved precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to mortar, concrete or materials. All such materials used at such times shall be heated. Right is reserved to suspend work at any time should climatic conditions be deemed unsuitable for proper execution of work.

3.18 FLOOR & WALL PLATES .1 Provide one piece nickel-plated flanges of stamped brass in finished areas at

points where exposed uncovered pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Secure plates at ceiling with integral brass set screw.

.2 Split plates will not be accepted. 3.19 WORK SCHEDULE .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements, for details of work scheduling and

comply with same.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.20 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review in accordance with Division 1, within 30 days of Contract award,

8 copies of Shop Drawings and Room Equipment Schedules covering material to be supplied.

.2 Make submittals of more than two pages in individual booklet form for easy

processing. Failure to comply may cause undue delay in approvals. Each shop drawing must be certified correct by submitting trade before submission.

.3 Review of Shop Drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with

general design concept. This review shall not mean that Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work of all trades.

3.21 EXAMINE SITE & CONDITIONS .1 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all Drawings and complete

Specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.

3.22 HIGH EFFICIENCY MOTORS .1 Provide high efficiency motors in accordance with CAN/CSA-C390-1998. This

applies to all three phase motors 1 HP and above. .2 Division 15 shall make the application for same when all the actual motor

horsepowers are finalized. .3 All motors shall bear nameplates listing nominal full load efficiency. END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 15250 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 7 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Insulation

JAL NO. 11-168

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15010, Mechanical General Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Work under this contract shall include but is not limited to the following. .2 Supply and install insulation for following piping and duct systems:

.1 Domestic water piping. .2 Miscellaneous piping and ducts noted on Drawings or in specifications. .3 Horizontal suspended sanitary soil and waste piping from W.C.'s, urinals

and drinking fountains. .4 Storm & sanitary drains as specified. .5 Water drain lines below handicapped lavatories. .6 Miscellaneous insulation as specified. .7 Domestic hot water storage tank. .8 Exhaust air ducts. .9 Refrigerant Piping .10 Concealed ducts carrying air conditioned air.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit detailed list of material for each service stating manufacture, 'K' value,

density, finish, flame spread and smoke ratings, permability, materials, finishes, cements and adhesives.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be incombustible and in compliance with

Ontario Building Code. Products containing asbestos shall not be used. .2 All insulation products used shall be fully tested and approved as fire retardent by

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Limited. .3 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout.


JAL NO. 11-168

.4 All insulating materials shall be fire retardent. Adhesives shall be waterproof and incombustible flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame spread classification of entire assembly shall not exceed 25 and smoke developed number shall not exceed 50. Submit report from an approved testing laboratory confirming foregoing ratings.

.5 Wheat pastes shall not be used. .6 Canvas covering shall be close weave fibre fire retarding canvas of weights

specified, 135.6 g/m2 where concealed and at least 203.4 g/m2 where exposed to view.

.7 Consultant reserves right to demand test samples to composite insulation systems

for fire hazard test rating. .8 Where wire is specified to secure insulation, it shall be stainless steel wire, 1.3 mm

gauge, dead soft annealed type. 2.2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION .1 Unburied domestic cold water piping: 25 mm thick heavy density glass fibre

preformed pipe insulation with maximum of 0.033 conductivity at 10oC mean with factory applied vinyl foil kraft laminated glass fibre reinforced fire resistive vapour barrier jacket with not more than 1.15 perm rating (ASJ) with sealed lapped joints. Insulate fan coil unit condensate pipes with 38 mm insulation.

.2 Unburied domestic recirculation and hot water piping: heavy density glass fibre

preformed pipe insulation with maximum 0.043 conductivity at 93oC mean with factory applied fire resistive vapour barrier jacket of not more than 1.15 perm rating. Use 25 mm thickness on piping up to 50 mm size, and 38 mm thickness on piping 63 mm and above.

.3 On water and waste piping and trap below each Handicapped lavatory: insulate

with 13 mm Armaflex II or Acwil "Therma-Cel" flexible foamed elastomeric insulation. Paint insulation with two coats of "White Finish".

.4 Unburied Rain Water Leaders and storm drains both exposed and concealed:

insulate with 25 mm thick fiberglass pipe covering with factory applied aluminum fire resistant vapour barrier and sealed lapped joints. Insulate underside of roof hoppers.


JAL NO. 11-168

.5 Horizontal runs of sanitary drains: insulate as for storm drains above. Also insulate horizontal wastes from urinals, toilets and drinking fountains concealed in ceiling spaces to vertical stack.

.6 Provide PVC jacketing to all exposed pipes inside building. All fittings must have

formed PVC covering. Exterior exposed piping: weatherproof insulation with two coats of Flintkote #C-29 applied over 45# building paper copper wired on and sealed to approval. Install insulation after electric trace wiring is tested and approved, if tracing is specified.

.7 Valves and fittings: 25 mm glass fibre blanket conforming to CGSB #51-BF11

compressed to same thickness as adjoining insulation and secured with jute twine. Over this apply smooth coat of insulating cement and recover with 4 oz. (135.6 g/m2) canvas. On cold water piping wrap blanket with foil faced friction tape overlapped to form vapour barrier before applying insulation cement. Seal all vapour barriers.

.8 Insulate refrigerant piping with Armaflex II insulation. .9 H.W. heating piping: 38 mm thick heavy density glass fibre preformed pipe

insulation with maximum of 0.033 conductivity at 10oC mean with factory applied vinyl foil kraft laminated glass fibre reinforced fire resistive vapour barrier jacket with not more than 1.15 perm rating (ASJ) with sealed lapped joints. Insulate steam and condensate pipes with 38 mm insulation.

2.3 DUCT INSULATION .1 Exhaust air ducts (for 1800 mm from fan): 25 mm thick glass fibre 12 kg/m3 density

flexible duct insulation with reinforced foil faced flame resistant kraft vapour barrier. Insulation shall have 0.0-3 perm rating minimum.

.2 Insulate all concealed supply air ducts carrying air conditioned with 25 mm thick

fibre 12 kg/m3 density flexible duct insulation with reinforced foil faced flame resistant kraft vapour barrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING .1 Insulation shall not be installed until piping and ductwork has been tested to

Consultant's satisfaction. Repair to or replacement of insulation is required if installed prior to such testing approvals being given.


JAL NO. 11-168

3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .1 General

.1 Pipe and fittings shall be dry, free of dirt, scale, rust, oil and grease before insulation is applied. Rustproof ferrous materials where necessary as directed by Consultant using approved materials and methods.

.2 All insulation material and adhesives shall be installed in strict compliance

with latest editions of manufacturer's recommendations and shall present neat workmanlike appearance upon completion.

.3 Under no circumstances shall ambient temperature in space be less than

10oC during application of any insulation or finishing. Where higher temperature is required by manufacturer's recommendations, this higher temperature requirement shall be complied with.

.4 Work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work. .5 Recover all interior insulation exposed to view with 6 oz. (203.4 g/m2)

canvas duck pasted on over insulation with approved flame resistant adhesive to form smooth even surface.

.6 Work which is inaccessible for application of insulation after installation

shall be insulated and finished before being placed in position. .7 Provide suitable approved openings in insulation for inspection outlets,

equipment nameplates and operating devices. .8 Install all insulation in first class manner with smooth and even surfaces.

Outline of round insulation shall be true circular and concentric shape. Outline of fitting insulation shall be shaped to blend with adjacent covering. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where full length section will fit.

.9 Joints in insulation shall be made by cementing pieces together and

finishing so that there are no cracks or gaps. .10 Take care that insulation over flexible connections in piping does not unduly

increase lateral or longitudinal stiffness of connections. .11 Sectional insulation furred into spaces or concealed in walls, hung ceilings

and pipe spaces shall not have extra jacket. However, canvas covers supplied as standard on insulation used in such locations, shall remain with overlap pasted down.


JAL NO. 11-168

.12 Keep insulation clear of instruments, controls, components, access doors and operating devices so that it will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of or access to same. Verify with Consultant as to whether such items are located properly before applying any insulation, otherwise be responsible for all retouching that may be required.

.13 Repair and reseal all breaks, cracks and perforations in vapour barriers.

Seal all weld pin penetrations of vapour barrier with 100 mm x 100 mm patch of aluminum foil tape.

.14 Size all insulation exposed to view and leave ready for painting by another

Section unless otherwise noted. .15 Insulation shall continue through sleeves and openings except at "Required

Fire Separations" where sleeves and openings shall be "Fire Stopped". Insulation shall be butted tight to fire stopping and vapour sealed.

.16 Insulate all piping noted to be electrically traced. Install insulation after

electric trace wiring is tested and approved. .2 Pipework

.1 Pipe insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through pipe sleeves except where otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on pipes in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material.

.2 Insulation shall be continuous on piping systems. Insulate valves and joints

to same thickness of insulation as specified for pipe. Seal vapour barriers to approval where pipes pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.

.3 Do not insulate unions but terminate pipe insulation neatly with cement at

each end of unions except on cold water piping where unions shall be insulated.

.4 Carry insulation through hanger clevises and where noted use insulation

protection saddles supplied by Section 15400, and 15750 between clevis and insulation.

.5 Insulate water piping in cupboards and closets as for exposed piping. .6 Hangers directly supporting cold water piping shall be insulated and vapour

sealed as part of adjoining pipe. .7 Buried cold water piping need not be insulated.


JAL NO. 11-168

.3 Ductwork

.1 Co-operate with sheet metal installer to ensure correct installation of insulation plugs for pitot tube test openings in ductwork.

.2 Duct insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through sleeves except where

otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on ducts in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material. Seal vapour barriers to approval where ducts pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.

.3 Where duct insulation is secured by wire or glass twine, it shall not be

drawn so tightly as to unduly compress insulation. Where Consultant judges insulation has been compressed too much under wire or twine or at corners, it shall be removed and reapplied.

.4 Sagging of duct insulation will not be accepted. Remove and reapply. .5 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier by hanger or rods.

Remove hangers temporarily to facilitate installation of vapour barrier where required.

.6 Supply and install cap strips to cover turned out legs of ductwork

reinforcing and supporting members. .7 Seal duct insulation at all joints, pins and openings. Tape joints with

approved self-adhesive foil faced 50 mm wide vapour barrier tape. .8 Insulate each duct access door to maintain insulation and vapour barrier

rating when access door is closed. .9 Where ducts are acoustically lined, thermal insulation is not required but

shall overlap liner at least 150 mm. .10 Insulate 1800 mm of concealed exhaust ducts (from outlet).

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Keep insulation materials dry while in shipment and on site. .2 Treat all insulation and finishes so that maximum Flame Spread Rating is 25 or

lower and Smoke Index Rating is 50 or lower.


JAL NO. 11-168

.3 Protect insulation passing through walls and similar barriers with a metal sleeve large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 15400 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 14 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Plumbing & Drainage

JAL Project No.: 11-168

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Comply with requirements of Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture and of best quality of their respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout.

.2 All pipe fittings, valves, expansion joints, strainers, measuring devices, safety

devices and similar pressure retaining components shall comply with Boiler & Pressure Vessels Act of Ontario and C.S.A. #B.51 in compliance with M.C.C.R. Technical Standards Division Directive of December 9, 1985 and Appendix 'A' thereto.

2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS

.1 Buried interior drains laid on approved solid bedding shall be D.W.V. plastic P.V.C. solvent weld gravity sewer pipe (CSA #B182.1) SDR-28 to 150 mm size and SDR-35 for larger sizes. Use same material for wall hung urinals.

.2 Unburied waste piping shall be: 27.6 MPa class cast iron Soil Pipe CSA #B70 tar

coated or DWV copper drainage pipe with solder fittings. Approved plastic pipe can be used if acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Interior Water Piping: Type `K' or 'L' hard copper with solder pressure fittings for

unburied NO ferrous piping, fittings, bushings or plugs shall be used. Provide Dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials. All copper water piping shall be certified for compliance with the ASTM B88-83 Standard, with certification markings on same.

.4 Vent Piping: galvanized steel pipe schedule #40 (ASTM #A53) with 1035 kPa

steam WP galvanized malleable fittings, copper `DWV' pipe with solder fittings or 27.6 MPa class cast iron Soil Pipe. Approved plastic DWV above ground can be used above ground if acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction.



2.3 VALVES

.1 Shut-off valves on branch lines to room fixtures and equipment up to and including 50 mm size may be brass ball valves rated for 1034 kPa WWP.

.2 Provide Tour & Anderson Model 786 balancing valve c/w check and shut-off

valve at each branch of hot water recirculation line. 2.4 CLEANOUTS

.1 Cleanouts in concrete floor shall be Zurn #1602SP, Watts #CO-200-1-34, Mifab C1100 –R-1-34 Smith 4220 adjustable floor cleanout with round scoriated nickel bronze cover; in terrazzo areas with Zurn #1608SP, Watts #CO-200U-34 Mifab C1100-U-1-34 Smith 4180 cleanout cover; in tiled areas with Zurn #1603SP, Watts #CO-200T-34 Mifab C1100-T-1 Smith 4140 cleanout cover and Zurn #1504, Ancon #CO-200-RC, C1100-RC-1-34 Smith 4020Y in carpeted areas. In ceramic or quarry tile areas, cleanouts shall be as for terrazzo except with square top. In seamless floors cleanouts shall be Ancon #200FC or Zurn 1602-R6-SP, Watts 200-RFC-34, Mifab C1100-RFC-1 Smith 4220PC, or equal. All cleanouts must have inside gasketted C.I. plug. J.R. Smith are acceptable as an alternate.

2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

.1 Water hammer arrestors shall be PP In. or equal, sized and installed as per Manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide unit in accordance with the following schedule:

Model Fixture Unit SC-500 Up to 11 SC-700 12 – 32 SC-1000 33 – 60 SC-1250 61 – 113

2.6 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Floor Drains shall be as noted below.



.2 Finished Floor - Floor Drains: Zurn 401-B, Watts #FD-100-C-A5-1, Mifab F1100-5-1 Smith 2005A lacquered cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange, weep holes, combined two piece body and reversible clamping device with adjustable 125 mm diameter, nickel bronze strainer with narrow slots with free area of 40.5 cm2 minimum.

.3 Unfinished or Concrete Floor - Floor Drains: Zurn 556, Watts FD-320-4, F1320-

4 Smith 2005A lacquered cast iron floor drain with deep sump, seepage flange and integral clamping device, adjustable collar and galvanized or epoxy coated cast iron locking grate with minimum free area of 75 cm2 and load capacity of 17.2 MPa (failure 31.7 MPa).

.4 Funnel Floor Drains (FFD): Zurn 401-BF, Watts #FD-100-EG-1 F1100-EG-1

Smith 2320/3590 Finished Floor Drain fitted with 75 x 225 x 100 mm high nickel bronze oval funnel/strainer in lieu of round strainer.

.5 Hub Drain: Zurn 415S, Watts FD-100-C-DD-50, Mifab F1100-DD-50 Smith

2005/2645 fitted with cast iron Hub type funnel. .6 Seamless or sheet vinyl floor drain: Zurn ZN-401R, Watts FD-100-FC, F1100-

FC Smith 2051.

2.7 FIXTURES & FITTINGS

.1 Provide plumbing fixtures shown or noted complete with necessary fittings and escutcheons of specified manufacturer. Fixtures and fittings shall conform to C.S.A. B45.1, B45.4 and B125 amended to date.

.2 ALL plumbing fixtures shall be of one manufacture except where specifically noted

as a special manufacture. ALL plumbing brass and trim shall be of one manufacture except where specifically noted as a special manufacture. Verify each fixture with millwork provided by Another Section. Fixture must be compatible type. No extra will be allowed if revisions is required due to millwork provided by Another Section.

.3 VERIFY mounting height of all fixtures with Architect BEFORE ROUGH-IN. .4 Submit three copies of fixture shop drawings for Owner’s approval indicating room

names and numbers where each fixture is located.



.5 Alternate Equipment: Fixtures & Trim

1. Kohler 2. Zurn

Faucets:

1. Chicago 2. Powers

Trims:

1. Powers Drinking Fountain:

1. Haws Emergency Equipment 1. Speakman

Mop Sinks 1. Acorn Sinks 1. AMI

Flush Valve 1. Delta .6 Toilet - Floor Mtd. Flush Valve (W-1) American Standard `Madera' #3453.001, `Water Saver' Toilet, vitreous china

elongated syphon jet action bowl, 38 mm top spud, with flange bolts, bolt caps, floor flange and gasket. Sloan 152-1.28-WB-ES-S c/w transformer, flush valve, C.P. quiet action diaphragm type with vacuum breaker, seat bumper on angle stop, pressure loss check and with non-hold open feature. Olsonite #10CC, Centoco #1500 seat, Bemis 1955C elongated heavy duty solid plastic black open front less cover, with check hinges and chromated steel posts, washers and nuts.



.7 Toilet - Floor Mtd. Flush Valve Barrier Free Design (W-2) American Standard #3463.001 toilet, vitreous china elongated syphon jet action

bowl 38 mm top spud, with flange bolts, bolt caps, floor flange and gasket. Sloan Model 152-1.28-WB-ES-S c/w transformer, dual flush valve, C.P. quiet action diaphragm type, vacuum breaker, centre seat bumper on valve, angle stop, pressure loss check and with non-hold open feature. Centoco #820ST Olsonite 46, Bemis 1950 seat, elongated heavy duty black solid plastic open front with cover, with check hinges and chromated steel posts, washers and nuts.

.8 Lavatory (L-1) – Vanity - Standard

Franke Model OV 13174-5 undermount suitable for handicap use. Delta 86T1153 with 3070 LF mixing valve, faucet, 33260 open grid strainer, 47T312 angle supply with S.D. stops, 33T311 ‘P’ trap with cleanout and escutcheon plates. Provide hot water mixing valve in ceiling space to hot water line serving lavatory and supply tempered water to hot side of faucet.

.9 Lavatory (L-2) – Vanity – Handicap Franke Model OV 13174-5 undermount suitable for handicap use, lavatory

complete with Delta 86T1153 with 3070 LF mixing valve, hardwire with transformer faucet, 32 mm 33T311 C.P. ‘P’ trap with C.P. 32 mm 33T26P offset waste fitting with open grid strainer; 10 mm C.P. 47T312 angle supplies with close to wall screwdriver stops and escutcheons. Provide hot water mixing valve in ceiling space to hot water line serving lavatory and supply tempered water to hot side of faucet.

.10 Lavatory (L-3) - Wall Mounted - Handicap Franke Model WT600C-7 with shroud wall mounted lavatory complete with Delta

86T1153 with 3070 LF mixing valve, 32 mm 33T311 C.P. `P' trap with C.P. 32 mm 33T26P offset waste fitting with open grid strainer; 10 mm C.P. Teck 47T312 angle supplies with close to wall screwdriver stops and escutcheons. Provide floor supported chair carrier. Provide a Delta 3070-LF mixing valve in ceiling and provide tempered water to hot side of faucet.

.11 Urinal (UR) American Standard c/w Model 6515.50 with Sloan 195-WB-ES-S flush valve with

transformer, china wall hung urinal with integral flushing rim, shields, trap, 19 mm top inlet and 50 mm back outlet and steel support hangers. Support with Zurn #Z-1222, Smith or equal cast iron floor supported Urinal Chair Carrier for rigid support concealed behind finished wall.

.12 Drinking Fountain (Stainless Steel) (DF) Elkay Model LZS8WSVRSK with EZ H2O bottle filler refrigerated unit with glass

filler, strainer, concealed mounting plate. `P' Trap 32mm (concealed in wall) and Stop on supply pipe. Provide floor supported chair carrier.



.13 Mop Service Basin (MSB) Fiat TSB-800 complete C.P. Delta 28T8193 combination wall mounted faucet

with hose outlet and integral vacuum breaker mounted 900 mm above floor; 75 mm 'P' trap under floor. Caulk and seal floor basin to rear wall and floor to approval. Supply 762 mm length of 13 mm rubber hose Model 832 AA on faucet outlet. Include E 77 AA rim guard. Provide with each MSB one Acorn Safety Model SO401-CH12-TMB1 eyewash with Thermostatic mixing valve. Provide Watts 909 or equal backflow preventer to each water supply to serving MSB. Also provide a valved waterline to chemical feed unit c/w backflow preventer.

.14 Mop Service Basin (MSB) Stern Williams Model SBC-1500, 610 x 610 x 300 mm deep, complete with

stainless steel dome strainer and lint basket; brass drain outlet for 75 mm inside caulk; C.P. Delta 28C2384 combination wall mounted faucet with hose outlet and integral vacuum breaker mounted 900 mm above floor; 75 mm 'P' trap under floor. Caulk and seal floor basin to rear wall and floor to approval. Supply 762 mm length of 13 mm rubber hose Model 832-AA on faucet outlet. Include E-77-AA rim guard. Provide Watts 909 backflow preventer to each cold and H.W. supply line. Supply with each MSB one Haws 8901-9201 eye/body wash.

.15 (S-1) One Compartment Franke LBS6808 back ledge 18-8 18 gauge stainless steel, mirror finished ledge,

self-rimming, counter mounted, with crumb cup strainer, sound deadening. 33260 ‘P’ Trap cast brass, 38 mm with cleanout, union and escutcheon. Trim fitting Delta 26C3933, gooseneck, Faucet, with ¼ turn positive shutoff, C.P. deck mounted, with cast brass body, swing spout with vandal proof flow aerator and cast metal lever handle.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

.1 Provide 19 mm lockshield 100# steam W.P. hose cock at main low points to drain each water type system. Provide 13 mm lockshield hose cock on each water type downfed unit.

.2 Pipe outlets of relief valves, boiler and equipment drains and valves full size to

end approximately 50 mm above Funnel Floor Drains. Pipe each outlet individually.



2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

.1 Provide Wilkins or Watts backflow preventer of reduced pressure types. 2.10 RECIRC PUMP

.1 Provide Armstrong all bronze circulator Model S-25 62 watts with manual on/off starters. Pipe up recirculation pump to existing water heater.

2.11 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER .1 Provide Bradford White Model M-1-WH6U6SS, 1500 W, 120V/1, 23 liters

capacity. glass lined hot water storage tank heater pre-wired and built for 125# ASME Code working pressure complete with insulated metal jacket, standard warranty, C.S.A approval label and 13 mm drain cock.

.2 Alternate: 1. A.O. Smith 2.12 FIRE EQUIPMENT

.1 Each Fire Extinguisher cabinet shall be National Fire Equipment Model #102RS, fully recessed 1.6 mm prime coated steel cabinet with 2.8 mm gauge door and trim, 4.8 mm thick Lexan viewing panel and Corbin latch.

.2 Supply in each F.E. cabinet and where shown, U.L.C. #3A/10BC (2.27 kg) rated

pressure power multi-purpose fire extinguisher complete with enamel steel jacket, pressure gauge, locking pin, hose and nozzle, hanger bracket.

.3 Provide where later directed, U.L.C. #3A-10BC (2.27 kg) rated pressure powder

multi-purpose extinguisher with baked enamel steel casing, pressure gauge and hanger: (total of 6 unit required).

.4 Provide 2 litres Class ‘K’ fire extinguisher in each kitchen. .5 Alternate Equipment: 1. Wilson & Cousin



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTS

.1 In addition to tests required by local authorities, test new piping and drains in presence of Consultant as hereinafter described.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing at least 48 hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do

so may require test to be redone. .3 Ball test drains to Ontario Plumbing Code as amended to date. .4 Water test drains, storm, waste and vent piping to top of piping for not less than

two hours without dropping in level. .5 Final air test drains, waste and vent piping to Plumbing Code. .6 Pressure test water piping with 1000 kPa cold water for not less than four hours

without decrease in pressure. Test on buried water piping may be made after piping has been partially backfilled to hold in position but all joints shall be exposed to inspection.

3.2 VENTING

.1 Vent fixtures and traps according to Plumbing Code and local regulations. Increase vents smaller than 75 mm diameter to 75 mm before same pass through roof.

.2 Connect vent lines into soil and vent stacks above highest fixture or separately

carry through roof. End soil stacks and vent piping 400 mm above roof. .3 Fit each soil and vent pipe through roof with vandal proof vent caps equal to Zurn

Model Z-193. 3.3 CONNECTIONS TO FIXTURES

.1 Trap each fixture and floor drain same size as outlet according to Plumbing Code. Vent each trap as outlined above where required by Plumbing Code.



.2 Provide each fixture with waste and trap, vent and water as shown or required and in accordance with following schedule:

Fixture Trap Vent Cold Hot Lavatory 32 mm 32 mm 13 mm 13 mm Water Closet 75 38 25 - Sink 38 32 13 13 Floor Drains 75 Min. 38 10 - Drinking Fountain 32 32 13 -

3.4 JOINTS

.1 Make all joints in piping to conform to Plumbing Code and to approval. .2 Make joints in copper waste, vent and water piping with certified lead free solder

with non-corrosive soldering flux. Clean and ream each joint and remove excess solder and flux. Other lead free solders giving equivalent strength joints may be used.

.3 Buried copper water pipe to be continuous with no joints. .4 Make joints in threaded pipe with lead free joint compound. Use of lampwick or

hemp will not be permitted.

3.5 PIPE & FITTINGS

.1 Provide all necessary piping including fittings, unions, etc., to complete systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacture's specifications and published directions. All piping shall conform to Plumbing Code.

.2 Chrome plate all exposed uninsulated pipes, fittings and valves in washrooms

and other occupied areas unless otherwise directed. .3 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off

valves in piping connections to equipment, tanks and fixtures so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.



3.6 VALVES

.1 Provide valves of types noted as required for ease of maintenance and operation.

.2 Provide shut-off valves on water piping leading to each battery or group of 2 or

more fixtures whether or not shown. Each washroom shall be considered as a group and be valved as a unit unless valved in two or more groups. Locate for easy operation through suspended ceilings and access doors.

.3 Provide shut-off valve at top or base of each domestic water and branch main. .4 Provide check valve, shut-off valve and Tour & Anderson Model 786 circuit

balancing valve suitable for potable water system on each circulation branch pipe.

3.7 DRIPS & DRAINS

.1 Provide 13 mm lock-shield brass hose cocks at base of each water riser, on branch mains and runouts and at low points, set on riser or fixture side of shut-off valves. Provide sufficient valves to ensure complete draining of all water piping.

3.8 EXPANSION PROVISIONS

.1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction complete with swing joints as necessary.

.2 Anchor and guide piping where necessary.

3.9 CLEANOUTS

.1 Provide cleanouts to conform to Plumbing Code. Grease cleanout plugs and covers BEFORE installation. Open and clean each cleanout after floors are finished to ensure easy access for cleaning. Enpoco products are acceptable.

.2 Make each cleanout full size of drain up to and including 100 mm, and 100 mm

size for drains over 100 mm. Extend buried cleanouts up to floor with 'Y', 1/8th bend and recessed brass plug.



.3 Make each cleanout accessible and wherever necessary, extend branch connections to finished surfaces of walls and floors and fit with cleanout cover and access door.

.4 Provide "Barrett" type cleanout in base of each soil and vent stack and each

rainwater leader. .5 Provide 'Y' type line cleanout on each waste pipe and stack 50 mm size and

smaller extending vertically above grade floor immediately before same becomes buried.

.6 Provide cleanout at each wall hung urinal complete with C.P. access door and frame.

3.10 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 Provide Floor Drains of types noted, where shown or directed, complete with strainer and accessories noted or required to complete installation. Set each drain to required level to approval.

.2 Trap and vent each Floor Drain as required by Code. Provide urinal flush tank

and prime to each trap. Trap seal each with 10 mm copper water line from nearest sanitary fixture or by automatic trap seal primer and strainer on cold water line. Where more than one floor drain unit is fed from common water supply, provide equalizing header.

3.11 PIPE GRADING

.1 Unless otherwise noted, drains and waste piping shall grade DOWN in direction of flow as follows:

Up to and including 75 mm size - 1:50 100 mm size and larger - 1:100 .2 Grade Hot and Cold Water piping UP in direction of flow 1:240. Grade circulation

piping DOWN in direction of flow at 1:240. .3 Grade Vent piping UP from fixtures so it is self-draining. Minimum grade shall

conform to Plumbing Code. .4 Grade H.W. heating piping 'UP' in 1:240 to air vents. Arrange piping to ensure

minimum number of vents.



.5 Grade equipment drain and waste piping 'DOWN' 1:240 minimum to waste receptacle.

3.12 FIXTURES & FITTINGS

.1 Set bolt caps and escutcheons in plaster of paris. Hang each fixture to

manufacturer's standards using all bolt holes and secure to wall to approval. Provide floor supported chair carrier for all wall hung fixtures including lavatories and urinals.

.2 Architectural drawings to govern in determination of number and location of

fixtures. Supply and install complete with all services every fixture shown on any Contract Drawing.

3.13 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER .1 Remove and relocate existing building water heater. Provide drain-off for the

unit. Provide T & P relief valve & pipe to Funnel Floor Drain. Provide 13 mm Watts #36A vacuum breaker on tank inlet after shut-off valve above top of tank.

.2 Provide Amtral Model ST 12C pneumatic tank for water heater and pipe up as

per schematic drawings. .3 Provide new water heater for Driver’s Lounge c/w all accessories described above. 3.14 WATER METER

.1 Remove existing meter and provide new 38mm cold water meter. Install on 150 mm high concrete base provided by this Section and secure meter in place to approval. Water meter shall be local P.U.C. approved unit.

.2 Provide line size shut-off valves on both sides of meter, meter size valved

bypass, test valve and 19 mm size drain valve piped to Funnel Floor Drain and pressure gauge at c/w valve at downstream of meter. Maintain clearances required by Utility. Also provide approved back flow preventer for the meter.

3.15 RECIRC PUMP

.1 Mount recirc. pump approximately 1 meter above floor. .2 Provide manual starter. Pump shall be interlocked to cycle from EMS.



.3 Wiring of pump and starter by Division 16.

3.16 FIRE EQUIPMENT

.1 Install each unit to manufacturer direction and to suit Fire Department approval.

3.16 TEMPORARY WATER

.1 Arrange and bring in permanent water service immediately after Contract is

signed and service available. .2 Provide off water service, temporary water connection at point agreeable to

General Contractor and Consultant where construction water may be obtained by trades engaged. Maintain service in working condition until water is available from building services.

.3 Locate flush valves for handicap fixtures on open side of wall and not to face

towards grab bar. 3.17 WATER SERVICE

.1 Connect domestic water service to existing water servicing. .2 Anchor each bend, tee, valve, and branch with 15 Mpa cast in place concrete to

Utility Standards. 3.18 SANTIARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM .1 Connect each fixture to sanitary main. 3.19 EXISTING SYSTEMS & MATERIALS

.1 Remove all existing unused pipes. Review extent of work on site. Cap unused pipes tight to mains, concealed inside floor, walls or ceilings in workmanlike manner. Remove discontinued piping except where buried or otherwise noted.



.2 All unused material shall be removed from site. Removed materials shall not be reused, be removed from site, not be allowed to accumulate and become property of Contractor unless otherwise noted.

.3 Verify fully all existing systems and site conditions as required to ensure proper

operation of all new equipments and systems. Also clean and adjust existing systems to full extent for full operation of new system to be installed. Clean and power flush all existing sanitary and storm lines to entire length to existing mains outside of building for proper operation of new. Allow for video inspection of buried lines for its size, elevation and condition.

.4 Before tender submission verify extent of work involved on site and routes of

new pipes through existing building. Relocate existing ducts, pipes, conduits, etc. in way of new pipes as required. No extra will be allowed due to any existing conditions.

3.20 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and of each complete system.

.2 Adjust flush valves, flush tanks, controls and valves to give proper performance

and to required settings. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.3 Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each

system. 3.21 WARRANTY

.1 Furnish to Owner through General Contractor and Architect, written warranty covering materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of lien period.

.2 Warranty shall entail repair and replacement of materials without charge to

Owner except where, in opinion of Architect, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of maintenance.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 15750 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 23 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Liquid Heat Transfer

JAL NO. 11-168

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Conform to requirements of Section 21 05 01 - Mechanical General

Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Supply and installation of new piping. .2 Supply and installation of other components, accessories and incidentals to

complete above systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. 2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Heating hot water supply and return piping: standard black welded steel pipe,

Schedule #40, CSA #B63 (ASTM#A53). .2 Fittings on unburied piping up to and including 50 mm size: 125# steam WP black

cast iron ANSI #B16.4. Fittings on 63 mm size and larger: #B16.9 butt-welding type with bends, tees and reducing couplings manufactured welding fittings where 2 sizes or less smaller than main.

.3 Flanges: 150# steam WP welding type, ANSI #16e, either slip-on or welding neck.

Unions: ground joint, 150# steam WP brass to iron face. 2.3 VALVES .1 Valves shall be Crane, Jenkins, McAvity or Toyo (Industrial Class) manufacture,

all-brass up to and including 50 mm size. Larger sizes shall be iron body, bronze mounted. Valves 100 mm size and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be for 125 psi steam working pressure or equivalent.


JAL NO. 11-156

.2 Shut-off valves, up to and including 50 mm size: lever handle ball valves rated for 600# WWP, Crane #9302 or Alternate.

.3 Shut-off valves 63 mm size and larger: Crane, McAvity, DeZurik, Toyo, Jenkins,

Demco, or Keystone lug wafer butterfly valves rated for 150# W.P., 135oC with bronze or alum/bronze disk, 18-8 S.S. shaft, EPT liner, 3 bearings, manual lockable lever operator, positive seal, conforming to MSS Standard SP-67 for dead end service with one flange disconnection.

.4 Check valves: of same materials and pressures as specified for gate valves above,

of swing check type with regrinding feature. Install check valves. Mission (Ontor Ltd.) "Duo-Check" #15SMF, Proquip Valve Inc. or Rite Mfgr. Ltd. check valves may be used in vertical position.

.5 Throttling, control or by-pass valves: globe type, Crane #14-1/2P or Alternate,

all-brass up to and including 50 mm size with stainless steel seats and discs. Larger size valves shall be butterfly valves as for shut-off valves but with manual gear operator.

2.4 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide in supply lines to fan coil unit, a S.A. Armstrong circuit balancing valve to suit pipe size.

.2 Circuit Balancing Valve shall be Model CBVI screwed end circuit balancing fitting

with shutoff/balancing valve, drain connection and meter connections. Fittings shall be rated for 862 kPa working pressure.

.3 Alternate Equipment: 1. Taco 2. Delta 'P' (Air Power Equipment)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING TESTS .1 In addition to any tests required by local authorities, or elsewhere stated, test

piping in presence of Consultant as hereinafter described. .2 Notify Consultant in writing at least 48 hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so

may require test to be redone.


JAL NO. 11-156

.3 Fill hot water heating piping systems with cold water and pressure test at 100 psi for not less than four hours without decrease in pressure.

.4 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test concealed piping before

concealing in structure. Protect equipment and materials not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.5 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove

and refit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted. .6 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary to ensure

tightness of each system. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION .1 Supply and install all necessary piping including fittings and unions to complete

systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacturer's specifications and published directions.

.2 Install piping to clear other piping, insulation, obstructions, access doors and

controls. Take branches off mains with fitting and 45o or 90o elbow. Locate valves for easy operation. Locate valves in accessible locations to approval and to suit access.

.3 Do not use ferrous piping, fittings, bushings, nipples or plugs in copper piping.

Supply Dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials or equipment on water supply.

.4 Make joints in copper piping with 95/5 tin/antimony solder with non-corrosive

soldering flux. Clean and ream each joint and remove excess solder and flux. Do not use hemp or lampwick on threads.

.5 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off

valves in piping connections to equipment so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.6 Install swing check valves in horizontal position ONLY. .7 Supply shut-off valve on connection to each item of equipment on system side of

union or compression fittings.


JAL NO. 11-156

.8 Supply on piping to and from each item of equipment necessary shut-off valves full size of line for isolating same on system side of unions or flanges.

.9 Pipe outlets of equipment drains and valves full size to end approx. 50 mm above

Funnel Floor Drains left by Section 15400. Pipe each outlet individually. .10 Provide drain piping with water seal trap from ventilation equipment and ducts. .11 Support piping independently of equipment to permit disconnection and removal

without disruption of piping system. Locate valves, unions and flanges to permit easy removal of coils and equipment with minimum removal of piping.

.12 Where air handling unit has multiple water coil sections, coils shall be reverse

return piped to act as single balanced flow unit. 3.3 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust valves, belt drives,

controls and thermostats as directed so that there is even distribution of cooling, heating and air throughout. Turn over to Owner necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.


JAL NO. 11-156

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust valves, belt drives, controls and thermostats as directed so that there is even distribution of cooling, heating and air throughout. Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15010 - General Mechanical Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Work under this contract shall include, but is not limited to, the following: .2 Supply and installation of split systems. .3 Supply and installation of supply/return air duct systems for heat pump units with

accessories to complete each system. .4 Supply and installation of all grilles, registers, diffusers, fire dampers, fire flaps and

accessories for all duct systems. .5 Supply and installation of duct acoustic liner in all ducts as specified. .6 Supply and installation of all components, accessories and incidentals necessary

to complete each system and put same in safe, efficient operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings for following: 1. Fan Equipment 2. Grilles, registers, diffusers 3. Air Cooled Condensing Units 4. Fan Coil Units

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 2 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. 2.2 STANDARD DUCTWORK .1 ALL DUCTS and duct systems must comply with and be constructed in

accordance with ALL applicable codes and regulations, and 1995 Edition SMACNA Standard whether shown or not.

.2 Ducts shall be made of first quality smooth finished, cold rolled galvanized steel

guaranteed to double seam without fracturing of thicknesses noted, as listed under Part 3 - Execution.

.3 Balancing damper operators shall be lockable quadrant type Duro Dyne #KS-195L. .4 Duct sealant shall be Multi-Purpose Air Duct sealant, U.L.C. labelled, as provided

by Trans Continental Equipment, Concord or Flexmaster Duct Bond II (Richmond Hill).

.5 Access doors shall be assembled with Duro Dyne SP-21 latch assembly, HP

series piano hinges and GN neoprene closed cell gasket material. .6 Test port shall be Duro-Dyne IP-1 or IP-2 as required. .7 Air turning assembly shall be double thickness type with Duro Dyne #VR-2 vane

rails. .8 Duct tape shall be Duro Dyne GS, 50 mm wide self adhesive duct tape. .9 Acoustic duct liner shall be 25 mm thick Fiberglass or equal rigid coated duct liner

of 4-1/2# density with flame spread rating of 25, fuel contributed rating of 15 and smoke developed rating of 40 with Neoprene face coating.

.10 Provide 25 mm thick acoustic duct liner in all supply, return and mixed air ducts of

heat energy recovery ventilation. .11 Flexible connections shall be 813.7 g/m2 Durolon coated glass fabric.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 3 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution 2.3 FAN EQUIPMENT .1 Fans shall be Penn Ventilator & Wilcorp. Each fan shall be dynamically and

statically balanced at factory and clearly indicate direction of rotation. Fans with forward curved wheels shall have adjustable outlet volume control. Each fan shall be A.M.C.A. rated and conform to standards of C.F.M.A. and A.S.H.R.A.E.

.2 Each fan shall have Canadian made motor for heavy duty continuous operation

selected to operate equipment at maximum efficiency of KW at least equal to brake KW. Each belt drive shall be adjustable at least 20% up and down from performance shown and have 1.5 service factor. Motors shall be drip-proof ball bearing type, grease lubricated unless otherwise noted. See 15010 Wiring and Motors, for further details such as start-up times. See Starter Schedule for phase and voltage conditions.

.3 Each fan on roof shall have suitable base for mounting on roof curb and platform

provided by this Section, have weather tight fastenings and integral C.S.A. approved HP rated disconnected switch mounted inside cover.

.4 Degrease and prime paint each fan at factory. .5 Each concealed ceiling cabinet type exhaust fan shall be Penn Zephyr exhaust

fan complete with acoustically lined fan housing, gravity backdraft damper, rubber mounted direct driven centrifugal fan with cord, plug and receptacle box, duct collars, C.P. inlet grille and wall box as scheduled.

.6 Each circulating fan shall be Wilcorp Manufacturing Ltd., Toronto, vertical

downward thrust indoor type, large diameter propeller ceiling fan complete with variable speed motor, mounting brackets, canopies, 19 mm diameter downrod, 3 wire BX connections and fire cutout. Supply for each group of fans noted, WMLE-30 solid state infinite speed controller with thermostat. See Fan Schedule. See Starter Schedule. Provide wire guard to enclose and protect each fan secured from building structure as shown on drawings. Provide guard on each speed controller.

.7 Provide for each fan noted in Fan Schedule, controls as noted. .8 Provide gravity backdraft damper on each exhaust fan. Backdraft damper shall

be of multi-bladed type with aluminum blades, neoprene edged and secured. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant located inside rigidly constructed frame of heavy gauge painted steel. Blades shall be inter-connected with tie rod on inside of frame which shall be weather-stripped all round and have counter-balanced arrangement to hold blades fully open when fan is on and tightly closed when fan is off.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 4 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .9 Alternate Equipment: 1. Jenn Air 2. Carnes Corp. 3. Loren Cook 4. Penn For Circulating Fans: 1. Pleasantaire 2. Banvil 2.4 GRILLES, REGISTERS, & DIFFUSERS .1 Provide E.H. Price Ltd. grilles, diffusers and registers of sizes and types shown

conforming to and Certified Test Rated in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Equipment Test Code No. 1062R2 of latest date.

.2 Grilles and registers shall be of steel construction with baked white enamel finish,

except in walls where prime coat finish shall be supplied. Joints shall be 'hairline'. Attachment shall be with stainless steel or C.P. screws with 6.4 mm thick urethane sponge gasket set under flange.

.3 Exhaust or return air registers, except where otherwise noted, shall be

#530D/F/S/A/B12, with removable key operated volume damper. .4 Exhaust or return air grilles in lay-in ceilings in sizes 300 x 300 mm and larger shall

be #80TB/B12 Steel frame return air grille with aluminum eggcrate face plate, 16 mm wide margin to fit 610 mm O.C. lay-in inverted T-bar ceiling, less volume damper. Where located in ducted system, register shall have volume damper.

.5 Supply air registers (except where noted) shall be #520/F/S/A/B12 with removable

key operated volume damper and shall have throw and deflection noted or required to suit room.

.6 Exhaust or return air grilles into ceiling spaces shall be #530D/F/S/A/B12 set on

transfer duct in ceiling. Where grille size is 300 x 300 mm or larger in ceiling, provide Series 80 grille. Return air grilles in Gym shall be heavy duty and of heavy gauge steel.

.7 Supply air registers in ceilings shall be 520D/F/S/A/B12. .8 Transfer door grilles will be supplied and installed by Division 8.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 5 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .9 Diffusers shall have white baked-on enamel finish. Diffusers shall be sized within limits of sound pressure level NC-32 curve in typical room having average attenuation of 8 DB. Each supply air diffuser shall be complete with flow equalizer and separate volume control operable from ceiling level. Supply diffusers shall be sized so that neck velocities do not exceed 900 fpm. .10 Type A diffusers shall be #SCDA-3, of steel construction and fit 600 mm O.C. T-bar suspended lay-in ceilings. Inner assembly shall be easily removable and adjustable. Diffuser face shall be 600 mm x 600 mm size unless otherwise noted. .11 Round diffusers shall be #RCDA, circular style of steel construction for surface or flush mounting to ceiling. Inner assembly shall be easily adjustable for projection heating. Secure diffusers to duct by a permanent means. Support circular diffusers in Gyms by proper chain to roof structure. .12 Alternate Equipment: .1 Titus .2 Nailor Hart .3 Kruger .4 Tutle & Bailey 2.5 FAN COIL UNITS

.1 Provide Trane units where shown on drawings. .2 Units shall be certified to deliver published heating and cooling capacities when

tested in accordance with current ARI Standard 441. Each unit, options and accessories shall be wired and assembled in accordance with NEC. Each unit (without options and accessories) shall be UL listed.

.3 Fan shall be centrifugal, forward-curved, double width type and shall be both

statically and dynamically balanced. Fan wheels and housing shall be of galvanized steel.

.4 Units shall be complete with DX coils, centrifugal fan and motor, insulated

condensate pan, 3-speed fan switch and 18 gauge galvanized steel casing panels. Each unit shall have factory installed internally lined plenum.

.5 Cabinet shall be constructed of cold-rolled steel, bonderized and coated with

baked enamel finish. Access panels shall have positive locking quarter turn fasteners for easy removal. Fasteners shall be slotted head type. Unit shall be complete with sound-lined return air plenum.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 6 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .6 Interior surfaces of casing panels shall be insulated with 13 mm thick glass fiber

meeting NFPA-90A requirements. Condensate pan shall be lined with 13 mm thick fire retardant closed cell foam insulation.

.7 Fan motors shall be 3-speed, tap-wound type with integral motor protection.

Motors shall be shaded-pole type. .8 Motor bearings shall be of sleeve type with oil tubes and oversized oil reservoir

to ensure positive lubrication. .9 Coil shall give capacity shown with staggered 13 mm OF copper tubes and

mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coils shall be leak tested at 2413 kPa minimum air pressure, and shall be suitable for up to 1724 kPa working pressure. Each coil shall have a manual air vent. Coil sweat connections shall be 16 mm OD copper.

.10 Filters shall be 25 mm thick throwaway type. Provide one set of spare filters for

all units. Filters must be easily accessible after installation of unit and shall be removable from below. Filters with fiberglass material are not allowed.

.11 Drain pans shall be of 18 gauge galvanized steel. Pans shall be pitched for

positive drainage and shall project under full length of coil, including return bends and headers.

.12 Units shall have hot water coil. Capacity is noted in Schedule. .13 Alternate Equipment:

1. McQuay 2. Carrier 3. Johnson Controls

2.6 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS .1 Units shall be Trane packaged condensing units for outdoor mounting. Unit shall

be C.S.A. and A.R.I. approved for service and have 5 year re-supply warranty on each compressor section. All temperature controls shall read in degrees

. .2 Units shall have capacities as shown. Unit shall have low ambient kit for -20oF

operation.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 7 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .3 Units shall be fully weatherproofed for outdoor installation. Casing shall be of

galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel or equivalent corrosion resistant surface of paint type. Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. Panels shall be removable to provide access for servicing. Compressor and control box shall be located in compartment other than that which contains condenser coils.

.4 Units shall operate in conjunction with fan coil unit. Provide Honeywell #T874D

room thermostat with Q674E sub-base to control heating and cooling in sequence. Provide necessary controls, relays, etc., to complete system.

.5 Units shall be built for operation on voltage shown. Supply all wiring diagrams

necessary to complete system. Diagrams shall be for specified system including controls, interlocks, safety devices, etc. Verify in field that installation conforms to wiring diagrams and system operates correctly.

.6 Compressor and condenser fans shall be internally vibration isolated. .7 Unit shall be complete with low ambient kit suitable for operations down to -20oC

.8 Alternate Equipment:

1. McQuay 2. Carrier 3. Johnson Controls PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STANDARD DUCTWORK

.1 Provide ducts and sheet metal shown and required to complete duct systems and put each in operating condition. Sheet Metal Trade is responsible for laying out this work. Drawings showing ducts must not be used for obtaining dimensions for layout except where dimensioned. Mechanical Drawings indicate general location and route of ductwork to be installed. General layout of ducts may be taken from Drawings but this Section is responsible for avoiding interferences with other Sections not specifically shown on Mechanical Drawings. Actual measurements shall be taken at building before ductwork is fabricated.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 8 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .2 Make without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to layout of

ductwork to accommodate structural, duct, piping, ceilings, electrical or equipment conditions, etc. Where openings in walls for ductwork have been provided by others, make full use of such openings by fabricating ductwork to fit them or if necessary, provide offsets and transitions to suit. Location of ducts may be altered if change is made before installation, is submitted in writing, is approved by Architect and does not cause Owner or other Sections any extra expense.

.3 Construct ductwork (unless otherwise noted) of galvanized or first quality smooth

finished, cold rolled galvanized steel guaranteed to double seam without fracturing of following thickness:

Longest Side Steel Colour mm-USG Code Up to 300 mm 0.5-26 Blue 301 to 750 0.6-24 Orange 751 to 1375 0.8-22 Green 1376 to 2150 1.0-20 Yellow 2151 & Over 1.3-18 White .4 Make duct work exposed to weather of soldered construction, prime painted and

finished in two coats of alkyd paint in approved colour unless protected or noted. .5 Form ducts with thickness (gauge) markings or colour coding on exterior of

ductwork visible from floor. .6 Make joints suitably air tight with laps in direction of air flow. Wherever possible,

sizes of ducts shall conform to those indicated. Where building conditions require shape be modified, ducts must have same cross-sectional area indicated and width of duct shall not exceed six times depth except with special approval. Duct leakage shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct leakage manual. Leakage shall not exceed the standard requirement, as they apply to the size of air handling systems.

.7 Construct ducts up to 600 mm with reinforced ribs formed by pocket slip spaced

not more than 2400 mm apart. Make ducts 600 mm and over in either dimension with reinforcing rib formed by pocket slip spaced not more than 1200 mm apart. Provide supplemental stiffening, etc. to prevent drumming and make a structurally sound assembly. Cross-break all duct faces except those to which rigid board type insulation is to be applied. Sheet Metal Contractor shall confirm reinforcement spacing before commencing manufacture and installation of ductwork.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 9 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .8 Install in ductwork where shown or required, controls, thermometers, motorized

dampers, coils, filters, smoke, fire and freeze detectors, etc., in accordance with setting instructions supplied by equipment supplier.

.9 Make downstream end of each section of concealed round ducts small and

beaded. Assembly by inserting small end into upstream end of adjoining section. Fasten joints in place by sheet metal screws spaced not over 75 mm apart and joint tape seal to approval with Arno #C-520 or Duro Dyno G.S. duct tape.

.10 Assemble various duct sections with Snap-Lock or Pittsburgh lock and grooved

longitudinal seams carefully closed for tightness and appearance. Join duct sections with pocket slip sized to conform to following requirements:

Maximum Duct Slip Slip Slip Side Duct mm-USG mm-USG Size Reinforced Up to 300 mm 0.5-26 0.5-26 25 mm No 301 to 750 0.6-24 0.6-24 25 No 751 to 1375 0.8-22 0.8-22 25 4 x 35 mm 1376 to 2150 1.0-20 1.0-20 38 4 x 35 mm 2151 & Over 1.2-18 1.2-18 38 4 x 35 mm All duct thickness and assembly shall conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards 1995 2nd Edition. .11 Support duct assemblies and components from building structure with 25 x 1.3 mm

thick galvanized steel 'Z' band hanger secured under ducts. Support ducts over 900 mm size with 6.4 mm steel rods and 32 x 32 x 6.4 mm angle iron up to 1800 mm and 50 x 38 x 9.5 mm angles and 9.5 mm rods for larger sizes. Space hangers at not over 1800 mm centres. See 15010-20 and 21.

.12 Make radius of turns at least one duct width. Where space prevents such radius,

make turns square and fit with turning vanes of double faced hollow type with Duro Dyne vane-rails secured with sheet metal screws.

.13 Provide manual balancing damper in each return or supply or exhaust takeoff or

branch set as close as possible to trunk duct. Make turning vanes, dampers, deflectors of same material and thickness as for equal size ductwork with formed edges, cross-broken and stiffened. Fit balancing dampers with lockable quadrant operator. No spinning connections are allowed on ducts. All balancing dampers in ducts with one dimension of 250 mm or larger shall be ‘TAMCO 1000’ multiblade damper, 200 mm and smaller ducts shall be single blade dampers. Provide access doors for concealed dampers.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 10 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .14 All ducts shall be minimum seal Class C regardless of pressure. .15 Seal all duct joints during construction with Air Duct sealant. Apply to faces of

joints before cleats are installed where space is restricted and after cleats are installed where access is available. All duct sealing compounds shall be water based and have an underwriter’s Laboratories Rating of a flame spread of 5 and smoke developed of 0 when applied 0.02” thick as minimum requirement.

.16 Install grilles and registers to manufacturer's direction. Supply and install baffles in

diffusers to suit air pattern. Adjust grilles and registers to give required air throw and pattern.

.17 Provide access doors of suitable size (min. 300 x 400 mm) for access to installed

equipment in ducts and where necessary for access to motorized, balancing and Fire Dampers. Make doors of 0.8 mm galvanized steel hinged to 0.8 mm galvanized mounting frame with approved quick opening fastening devices to give tight closure on fire resistant gasket. Provide access in ceilings where necessary for balancing dampers. Provide concealed operators for each splitter or balancing damper above fixed ceiling.

.18 Provide extension collars for outlets, sound absorbers, air guide vanes and other

special features as indicated or required including connections to equipment provided by Owner or other Sections. Transition ducts at not more than 30 degree slope to full size of each grille, register, louvre, coil or equipment.

.19 Paint inside of duct connections behind each grille and register with two coats of

black non-reflective paint to visually conceal duct interior to approval. .20 At floor line and at other points where ducts join louvres, concrete or masonry

construction or where ducts pass through floors, rivet ducts on approximately 150 mm centres to 38 x 38 x 3 m galvanized steel angles secured with expansion shields and bolts on approximately 300 mm centres and caulk air and water tight. At louvres, drill blades for drainage.

.21 Install ductwork to clear structural members and any fire-proofing. Locate ducts to

permit their proper insulation where required. Do not remove or damage structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit insulation and fireproofing to be inspected and repaired.

.22 Seal all ducts entering ceiling plenums air and noise tight with fibreglass packed

snug around all four sides and sealed with approved incombustible caulking/sealing compound to approval. If openings are larger than 25 mm, cement grout opening and then seal to approval. Report all other openings left unsealed in writing.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 11 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .23 Provide 12 x 12 mm mesh galvanized steel birdscreen over intake of each fresh

and open air duct. Hinge birdscreen on upstream end of ducts for easy opening and secure with catches at not more than 600 mm centres.

.24 Ducts passing through roof shall have suitable approved minimum 300 mm high

curb built and flashed over by another Section. Counter flashing of ducts by this Section, of same material and finish as flashing.

.25 Inside paint and seal all fresh air intakes, all fresh and mixed air ducts to Heat Reclaim

Unit, supply fan; and relief or exhaust ducts from motorized or gravity backdraft dampers to exterior outlets with two coats of C.I.L. #979 Houseguard or other approved anti-corrosion paint.

All ductwork shall conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards 1995 2nd Edition. That shall include pressure classification, leakage rate and sealing requirements. The Standard requirements shall override and others described in this section.

.26 Arrange ducts to drain to exterior at louvres. Pipe low points of fresh air and

exhaust ducts at fixed louvres and roof outlets to Hub Drain in 32 mm DWV copper pipe. Provide 6 x 6 mm mesh heavy copper screen over each inlet with trap on run. Provide access door to each drain screen.

.27 Provide flexible connections between equipment and duct work and where shown.

Provide suitable sheet metal rain guard for exterior fabric connections secured to fan only.

.28 Provide Duct Liner acoustic liner in duct work at each exhaust fan inlet connection

for not less than 3 m back from inlet including branches. Soundline all fan coil units supply and 6m of return air ducts.

.29 Acoustic Treatment Installation: .1 Adhere the liner to the interior sides of ductwork with a minimum of 75%

coverage of an approved cold waterproof adhesive, Bakor #230-38. .2 In addition, use mechanical fasteners, mechanical pins, adhered clips or

adhered nylon pins. Do not drill or punch holes through the ductwork. .3 Insulation shall be applied with all joints in close mechanical contact and all

joints and voids shall be filled with an approved waterproof fire retardant mastic. Waterproof mastic shall be applied over all anchors where they pierce the covering.

.4. The ductwork must be enlarged in these areas to maintain the same cross-sectional area shown on the plans.

.5 Protect leading edge of liner with a 1" (25 mm) metal strip.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 12 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution .30 Blank off unused portions of exterior louvres with 50 mm thick 72 g/m3 density rigid

fibreglass board sandwiched between two 1 mm aluminum sheets secured in place to approval. Paint surface next to louvre two coats of matte black over suitable primer.

.31 Provide where shown, flexible air duct hoses. Secure hose to metal ducts with

attachment screws and band clamps and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum length 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum length 50% more than measured length (max. 2 m). Provide manual balancing damper in trunk duct at connection to each flexible duct. Balancing dampers shall be opposed blades TAMCO 1000 c/w access door. Provide TAMCO 1000 dampers on all fresh air branch ducts connected to heat pumps or supplied to Classrooms.

.32 Provide pitot tube opening enclosures with cap and chain in ductwork for each

supply, return and exhaust system at the positions and quantities determined by Test and Balance Company, and to be as previously specified. Provide openings at all supply fan discharges, at return fan inlets and exhaust fan inlets, before and after silencers and heating coils in ductwork, and at main branch duct take-offs. Locate openings in straight duct runs, Provide a minimum of three holes per duct at each of above locations, and at not more than 450 mm centres.

.33 After final adjustments are made for air handling systems, lock each control device in position and visually indicate required setting. For balancing dampers, provide additional locking screw or bolt to approval.

3.2 FAN EQUIPMENT .1 Provide Penn fans of sizes, types and characteristics shown in Fan Schedule. .2 Support each cabinet and utility fan on open spring antivibration isolators rated at

not less than 95% efficiency so that noise and vibration will not be transmitted to building.

3.3 AIR COOLED CONDENSERS

.1 Set units on concrete pads. .2 Electrical Division will provide weatherproof disconnect switch at units and

terminate at line side of units control panel. Provide all wiring necessary to complete system.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 13 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution

.3 Start up unit and operate in conjunction with fan coil units. Set up and adjustment controls and operating devices to put units in safe, efficient operation condition to approval of Unit Manufacture.

3.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING & CONTROLS

.1 Provide all refrigerant piping complete with accessories to best engineering practice and to approval. Piping shall be 'ACR' hard copper with wrought copper fittings, thoroughly cleaned before installation, properly mounted by oversize isolation hangers and insulation protection shields, Myatt #251, see Hangers. Joints shall be made with silver solder. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction. Provide Vibro-Sorber on each pipe to each coil and condenser unit to approval for vibration isolation where not internally isolated.

.2 Refrigerant shall be #410A or #407C or latest approved type of which full initial

charge shall be supplied and installed in each system. Replace as necessary during one year warranty period.

.3 After completion of refrigeration piping installation, test each piping system under

air pressure for leaks. Repair any leaks detected. Evacuate each system by vacuum pump to 18” Hg. Each system shall hold same for 24 hours without decrease in vacuum. Upon completion of testing and dehydration process, each system shall be charged with refrigerant.

.4 Each refrigerant circuit shall be complete with thermal expansion valve and

solenoid valve to operate in sequence and provide effective system operation to approval. See Temperature Controls and following paragraphs. Provide hot gas by-pass control assembly on unit noted to manufacturer's directions including wiring. Provide all wiring necessary to complete each system including controls and inter-wiring to condenser units and DX coil solenoid valves and hot gas by-pass controls.

.5 Provide complete start-up service and instruct Building Operators in care and

maintenance of D.X. type Air Conditioning System. See Instructions to Operator. .6 Provide approved pressure gauge connection on inlet to each compressor,

condenser and evaporative coil connection. Provide approved sight glass in piping at inlet to each expansion valve. Provide removable core filter/drier in three valve bypass on inlet to each expansion and/or solenoid valve.

.7 Provide drain piping from unit in type 'M' hard copper with solder joint fittings.

Provide trapped, broken joint connections to approval.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 14 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution

.8 Mechanical Trade Insulator will insulate refrigerant piping. See Insulation. .9 The entire refrigerant piping system including pipe sizes, oil traps, etc. shall be

as per the recommendation of the manufacturer. 3.5 FAN COIL UNITS .1 Hang unit from building structure with vibration isolators. .2 Provide condensate drain line and drain above nearest floor drain. .3 Pipe units to existing H.W. heating system. 3.6 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust belt drives, controls,

dampers and thermostats so that there is even distribution of air throughout. Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.

.3 Each air handling system shall be balanced and air quantities per outlet listed and

forwarded to Engineer for checking and approval. Balancing Report shall be suitably bound, 8½” x 11” size, six copies required. Clean or replace filters and leave systems in clean operating condition.

.4 Test and balance each air system such that air quantities at each outlet, diffuser,

grille and register are within 5% of design figures. Fan speeds, splitter and balancing dampers shall be adjusted to achieve these results. Prepare and submit a final balancing report for checking and approval.

.5 Testing and balancing of air handling systems and hot water heating systems

shall be under supervision of qualified personnel. Balancing and testing shall be performed by trained personnel with records kept of each trial balance for supervision and approval.

.6 If spot checking reveals actual air quantities do not agree with air balance report,

this Section will be called upon to completely rebalance systems until satisfactory, without extra remuneration.

Guelph Transit Station Section 15850 Jain & Associates Limited Page 15 of 15 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Air Distribution 3.7 QUIET OPERATION .1 Each air handling system has been designed to be quiet in operation, N.C. 35

maximum. It is responsibility of this Section to supply equipment and install systems to ensure noise levels will be maintained satisfactory to Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16010 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 12 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Electrical General Requirements


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCE SECTIONS .1 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and

section 16010 – Electrical general requirements. Conform to Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein. Supplement with the following requirements.

.2 Conform to the conditions stated in the Contract Form and Supplementary Conditions.

.3 This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read accordingly. This Section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Division 16.

1.2 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or

methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment, tools, instruments, services and incidentals for Electrical Work, Division 16.

.2 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions nor to delegate work and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment, tools and inspection required for a complete and working installation as described.

.3 The Specifications are integral with the Drawings which accompany them. Neither is to be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but included in the other is properly specified.

.4 Wherever differences occur in the Contract Documents, the maximum conditions will govern and be allowed for in the Tender price. The item to be incorporated will be at the option of the Consultant.

1.3 DEFINITIONS .1 Where used, words "Section" and "Division" shall also include other Subcontractors

engaged on site to perform work to make building and site complete in all respects.

.2 Where used, the word “products” shall mean the material, equipment, component, machinery, or fixtures forming the completed work.

.3 Where used, word “connect” shall mean to supply and install all wiring and raceways and make all power connections to products.

.4 Where used, word "supply" shall mean to include all labour, materials and services to furnish to site in location required or directed complete with accessory parts, but is not intended to include installation.



.5 Where used, word "install" shall mean to include all labour, materials and services to secure in place products, including receiving, unloading, transporting, storage, uncrating, installing, connecting and performance of such testing and finish work as is compatible with degree of installation specified complete ready for use.

.6 Where used, word "provide" shall mean to supply and install as each is described above.

.7 Where used, word "commission” shall mean to startup and initial operation of products as required to demonstrate satisfactory operation of products and entire system including calibration of any instrumentation.

.8 Where used, word “work" shall mean the total construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labour, products and services.

.9 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted, permission, accepted, acceptance, report to", shall mean "approved, directed, permitted, accepted, report to", by Consultant.

1.4 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS .1 Conform to latest Government, Provincial and Municipal By-laws, regulations, Codes

and Standards and requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

.2 Conform to the following applicable standards and regulations as minimum, but not limited to:

Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standards Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Standards Ontario Electrical Safety Code (OESC) and Bulletins Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Requirements Canadian Underwriters Association (CUA) Standards Ontario Building Code (OBC) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC) Standards



1.5 TENDERS AND FORMS .1 Submit tender based on specified described equipment or alternates listed.

.2 Refer to Division 1 for Cash Allowances.

1.6 PERMITS AND FEES .1 Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, licences, certificates, connection charges and

inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. Include any premiums applicable due to requirements for after office hours inspections.

.2 The first submission of plans and specifications to ESA will be made by the Consultant. From then on, this contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with all the requirements of ESA.

.3 Submit all required documentation to the Authorities for their approval and comments before starting any Work. Provide all additional drawings, details or information as may be required. Comply with any changes requested by authorities as part of the contract, but notify the consultant immediately of such changes.

1.7 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONDITIONS .1 Examine the site and local conditions. Examine carefully all Drawings and complete

Specifications to ensure that work and equipment will satisfy conditions and performance requirements as shown. Examine the work of other Contractors and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies and omissions in writing, five working days prior to Tender closing.

.2 Submission of a Tender confirms that the Contract Documents and site conditions are completely understood and accepted without qualifications unless exceptions are specifically noted in the Tender.

1.8 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 The Contract Drawings of this Division are performance drawings and indicate the

scope and general arrangement of the Work. They are diagrammatic except where specific details are given. They shall be read in conjunction with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and all other Division Drawings of the Contract.

.2 Obtain accurate dimensions from the architectural and structural drawings, or by site measurement. Locations and elevations of services are approximate and must be verified before construction is undertaken.

.3 Make changes required to accommodate structural conditions, (beams, columns caps, etc.). Obtain Consultant's approval before proceeding.



.4 Adjust the location of materials and/or equipment up to 3 meters in any direction as instructed without adjustment to contract price, provided that the instructions are given before installation and rough-in.

.5 The drawings do not show all conduit and/or wiring or all structural, mechanical and architectural details. Plan and install conduit runs respecting all applicable conditions including structural, mechanical and architectural details.

1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Prepare and submit shop drawings of all Products in accordance with Division 1-

General requirements as specified herein and in each section of Division 16.

.2 Submit eight (8) copies of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall have a minimum 210 mm x 285 mm (8-1/2” x 11”) clear space on the front sheet, suitable for stamping. The cover sheet shall include the project name, Division 16 name and product description. Where multiple equipment is submitted under one binding, include an index of all equipment as the front sheet.

.3 Assume full responsibility for submission of shop drawings. Allow minimum two (2) weeks for Consultant's review.

.4 The Consultant will only review shop drawings bearing the Division 16 and Contractor's stamps of approval.

.5 Submit shop drawings showing the following:

.1 Submit shop drawings showing the following:

.2 Project name.

.3 Project tag number.

.4 Manufacturer's name and model number.

.5 Supplier's name.

.6 Approval agencies.

.7 Shipping and working weight.

.8 Performance characteristics.

.9 Dimensions, including required clearances.

.10 Electrical characteristics.

.11 Bill of materials and finishes.

.12 Time required to fabricate and deliver.

.13 All variations from Tender Documents.

.14 Construction and field connection details.

.15 Installation requirements.

.6 The Consultant's review shall not relieve this Division of responsibility to provide Products in accordance with the design intent and Contract Documents.

.7 Manufacturer's printed data sheets for standard items are acceptable providing pertinent characteristics are identified and relate to specified items.



.8 Each shop drawing shall be checked and stamped as being correct, by trade purchasing item, and by Contractor, before drawing is submitted. If above requirements are not complied with, shop drawings will be rejected and returned forthwith.

.9 Where applicable, provide wiring details, schematics, single line drawings, and wiring diagrams showing interconnection with work of other Trades.

.10 Verify and check dimensions to ensure proper installation of equipment in available space and without interference to work of other Trades. Ensure that electrical and all other coordination is complete prior to submission of shop drawings.

.11 Provide data sheets and samples for all wiring devices and wall plates prior to installation. Device and plate colours/finishes to be confirmed prior to ordering.

.12 Where requested, submit samples of Products for review and approval.

.13 Do not have equipment delivered to site until a shop drawing for the item has been reviewed.

1.10 INTERFERENCE AND DETAIL DRAWINGS .1 Prepare Interference Drawings in conjunction with all parties and trades concerned

showing sleeves and openings and passage of piping and conduits through building structure. Drawings shall also show inserts, curbs, equipment bases, anchors, special hangers and weights on all load points.

.2 Prepare fully dimensioned detail drawings of products and services in electrical rooms, service and ceiling spaces, and all other critical locations. Co-ordinate the Work with all other Divisions. Base drawings on reviewed shop drawings and indicate all details pertaining to access, clearances, sleeves, electrical connections, and elevations of pipes, ducts and conduits. Include location of access doors provided under this Division.

.3 Ensure that clearances required by jurisdictional authorities are indicated on the Interference Drawings. The Owner will not consider any extra cost as a result of the Contractor’s failure to prepare proper interference drawings.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and

clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.



.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.4 Prepare record drawings showing the following:

.1 Inverts of all services entering and leaving the building and at property lines.

.2 Dimensions of underground services in relation to property lines at key points of every run.

.3 Elevations of underground services in relation to ground floor level of the building.

.4 Location of all services embedding in the structure, utilizing grid line references.

.5 Dimensioned locations of all services left for future work.

.6 All changes to the Work due to Change Orders and Site Instructions.

.7 All changes to the Work during construction.

.8 All changes to structural and architectural elements that affect the backgrounds of this record set.

.9 Location and designation of all electrically supervised valves, flow switches and pressure switches.

.10 Location and designation of all items requiring access or service in a hidden location.

.11 Location of all access doors provided under Division 16.

.12 All changes and revisions to Specifications, details and equipment schedules.

.13 All homerun conduits, junction boxes for complete electrical systems.

.5 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant for review in the following form:

.1 One (1) copy of clean, legible prints.

.2 One (1) copy of AutoCAD 2010 format drawings. Files shall retain all setting (layers, line types, scales colours, etc) used in the drawing files provided by consultant.

.6 After Record Drawings have been reviewed, revised if necessary until acceptable to the consultant. Deliver drawings in the form of AutoCAD CD and one (1) set of prints taken from those disks to Owner.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL .1 Contractor will be responsible for collecting and organizing three (3) copies of all

data, operating instructions, maintenance and trouble-shooting instructions, parts lists, parts diagrams, evidence of all tests and certifications, complete reviewed shop drawings, etc. and assembling them in neat manuals in hard cover. Identify cover “Operation and Maintenance Manual for NAME OF THE PROJECT”. Manuals shall be separated with dividers in logical sections and volumes.



.2 Contractor shall also collect from Sub-trades and Suppliers all Guarantees/Warranties specified. Check that starting date (date of Substantial Performance of entire project) and extent of each guarantee/warranty are clearly indicated. Check also that all guarantees/warranties indicate Supplier’s Name or Subcontractor’s Name as appropriate together with contact phone number. Assemble neatly in labeled section of each manual.

.3 Prior to requesting Substantial Performing inspection, submit one (1) copy to Consultant for review. Make all corrections requested by Consultant and forward the corrected two (2) copies to the Owner.

1.13 SCHEDULING .1 Comply with the construction schedule. Conform to phasing of work if applicable.

Conform to interim and final completion dates.

.2 Co-ordinate electrical schedule with general construction schedule.

.3 Submit a bar chart schedule showing the start and completion dates for each activity based on a critical path analysis of the work.

.4 Include in schedule for electrical work done by others, e.g. Power Supply Authority connection.

1.14 ALTERNATES AND SUBSTITUTIONS .1 Substitute Products will only be considered when tendered Products become

unobtainable. State in tender the proposed substitute and amount added or deducted.

.2 It is the responsibility of this Division to ensure "Substitute Products" fits space allotted and gives performance specified.

.3 If Products manufactured and/or specified by a manufacturer named as equivalent are used in lieu of the manufacturer specified, be responsible for ensuring that the substituted Product is equivalent in performance and operating characteristics to the specified Product, and, it shall be understood that all costs for additional space, larger power feeders and changes to associated or adjacent work will be borne by the contractor offering the substitution. In addition, in Equipment Rooms where Products named as equivalent is used in lieu of specified Products and the dimensions of such Products differs from the specified Products, prepare and submit for approval, accurately dimensioned layouts of rooms affected.

.4 Contractor shall pay the Consultant on a per diem basis (hourly) for the review of the alternate Products for cost saving purpose.

1.15 VALUATION OF CHANGES .1 For each change submit a complete itemized breakdown of labour and material.

.2 Only the net difference between an extra and a credit will be subject to overhead and profit mark-up.



.3 Material shall be valued at current trade prices incorporating all discounts and labour rates.

1.16 WORKMANSHIP .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and

practice and be performed to approval. Work shall be done by tradesmen skilled in work to be performed. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade. Install all work and equipment to manufacturer's printed directions.

1.17 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordinate the Work with all Divisions. Inform other Divisions of the locations of

openings, chases, sleeves, supports, services, connections, etc., to be incorporated into the Work.

.2 Check the locations of all expansion/building joints and ensure that all electrical installations are at or crossing these locations are as detailed and as required to compensate for the possible movement at the joint.

.3 Confirm the exact location of outlets, fixtures and connections. Check architectural details and elevations for more requirements. Confirm location of connection points for equipment supplied under other Divisions or by the Owner.

.4 Install neatly all equipment and apparatus to allow free access for maintenance, adjustment and eventual replacement.

.5 Install metering and/or sensing devices to provide accurate and reliable sampling of quantities being measured. Install instruments to permit easy observation.

.6 Provide suitable shielding and physical protection for devices.

.7 Install all Products and services in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and/or recommendations.

.8 Provide all supports, hangers and fasteners. Secure all Products and services so as not to impose undue stresses on the structure and systems.

.9 Ensure that the load onto structures does not exceed the maximum loading per square meter (foot) as shown on structural drawings or as directed by the Consultant.

.10 Do not use explosive activated tools.

1.18 FIELD REVIEW .1 The Owner and Consultant shall have access to the site at all times for review of the

work during construction.

.2 Arrange for review of Products during manufacturing.

.3 Provide all gauges, instruments and other necessary measuring equipment required for review of the Work.



.4 Maintain a complete set of Contract Documents at all times for field reference by the Consultant.

.5 Correct any deficiencies as they are reported during the performance of the Work.

1.19 TEMPORARY SERVICES .1 Provide temporary office, workshop and tools and material storage space for the

Work and assume responsibility for any loss or damage thereto. Buildings erected for this purpose shall conform in appearance to those erected for similar purposes under other Divisions of Specification.

.2 Provide temporary lighting for whole construction area. Coordinate with General Contractor for requirements.

.3 Provide scaffolding and shoring necessary for work of this Division. Scaffolding and shoring shall be adequate to protect the workmen according to Provincial and Local Regulations.

.4 Provide rigging and millwrighting, labour and equipment necessary for the work of this Division. Employ only workmen well experienced and skilled in such trades for this portion of the work.

.5 Provide hoisting machinery, operators, labour and materials necessary to lift and place equipment supplied under this Division.

.6 The permanent systems or any part thereof shall not be used during construction for construction purposes, unless so permitted by the Owner, in writing.

1.20 PROTECTION AND CLEANING .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent entry

of dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts.

.3 Protect all finished and unfinished Work of this and other Divisions from damage due to carrying out of this Work.

.4 Make good any damage caused directly or indirectly to walls, floors, ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, etc.

.5 Before energizing any systems, inspect and clean the inside of all panelboards, switchgear and cabinets to ensure that they are completely free from dust and debris.

.6 Clean all polished, painted and plated work. Clean all lighting fixtures. Remove all debris, surplus material and tools.

.7 Carry out additional cleaning operations of systems as specified in other Sections of this Division and as Division 1 requirements.



1.21 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Separate and recycle waste materials.

.2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with General Contractor’s requirements.

.3 Divert unused wiring and metal materials to metal recycling facility, or place in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with General Contractor’s requirements.

1.22 MOCK-UPS AND TRIAL USAGE .1 Provide mock-ups in accordance with the conditions stated in the Contract Form and

Division 1 of the Specifications.

.2 Trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be so used.

1.23 COMMISSIONING .1 Commissioning shall commence with activation and verification of all systems in

accordance with requirements of the Specifications. This will include but not be limited to the following items to be tested, adjusted and verified: .1 Power distribution system .2 Lighting System .3 Fire alarm systems .4 Emergency lighting system

1.24 TESTING .1 Carry out all tests specified and tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. The

testing and adjusting is the responsibility of this Division.

.2 Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, expenses of the manufacturer's representative, and incidentals, and pay for all power and fuel required to carry out the tests.

.3 Submit the record of all tests and have these tests signed by Contractor's Superintendent and, where applicable the manufacturer's representative. Show in schedule form a record of the systems or parts of systems tested, the date of the test, the circumstances such as current, temperatures, etc., the duration of the test and any special remarks pertaining to events during the test. Note which tests have been witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Submit certification letters from the manufacturers of all equipment certifying that their technical representatives have inspected and tested their equipment and are satisfied with the methods of installation and operation. Where existing systems are



extended, provide letters covering both new and existing equipment and connections. These letters shall state the names of persons present at testing, methods used and a list of functions performed with location and room numbers where applicable.

1.25 INSPECTION .1 Arrange for inspection of all Work by the authorities having jurisdiction. On

completion of the Work furnish final unconditional certificates of approval by the inspection authorities.

.2 Application for final review will be considered when the Work has been completed and written declarations submitted that all commissioning, testing adjustment, set up and documentation is complete. Final review shall be done when:

.1 All reported deficiencies have been corrected.

.2 All systems have been balanced, tested, commissioned and are operational.

.3 The Owner has been instructed in the operation and maintenance of all equipment.

.4 All reports have been submitted and reviewed.

.5 All maintenance manuals have been submitted and reviewed.

.6 All tags and nameplates are in place and all data submitted and reviewed.

.7 Cleaning up is finished in all respects.

.8 All certificates are furnished.

.9 All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided.

.10 All record drawings have been submitted and reviewed.

1.26 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION .1 Provide personnel, equipment and tools to demonstrate and instruct Owner’s

designated personnel in operation, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment to satisfaction of the Owner. This work shall take place during Owner’s regular business hours prior to acceptance.

.2 Where specified elsewhere in this Division, manufacturers shall provide demonstration and instructions.

.3 Where deemed necessary, the Consultant or Owner’s agent may record these demonstrations via video tape or other means for future reference.

1.27 WARRANTY .1 Provide a written guarantee stating that systems, equipment, components, etc. have

been installed to manufacturer’s instructions, that systems meet the contract requirements and that all deficiencies in material and labour occurring within one year after substantial completion, will be corrected at no charge.

.2 Obtain Product warranties in excess of one (1) year from the manufacturer on behalf of the Owner. These Product warranties shall be issued by the manufacturer to the benefit of the Owner.



.3 Instruct all manufacturers and suppliers that warranties on Products will commence at the date of Substantial Performance and not from the date the Products are put into operation.

All corrections to deficiencies listed in field review reports and other correspondence, as well as but not limited to those indicated in testing, adjusting, balancing and commissioning shall be completed prior to turn over.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16050 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 22 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Basic Materials and Methods


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This section of specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall

be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and section 16010 – Electrical general requirements.

.3 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishings of labour, materials, and equipment required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete Electrical systems as shown, as specified and as otherwise required. Complete systems shall be left ready for continuous and efficient satisfactory operation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and product data for products specified in this section in

accordance with Section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.

1.3 PRODUCTS .1 Products shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality and

uniform throughout. Submit tender based on the use of products and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.2 Electrical products s shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Products not C.S.A. approved shall receive acceptance for installation by Ontario Hydro Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for such acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Products shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.3 Where manufacturer is not specified provide products of high commercial standard and quality consistent with the standards of these specifications. Provide products of same manufacture for like applications unless noted otherwise.

.4 Products shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with latest issue of applicable Standards or Authorities when such are either mentioned herein, or have jurisdiction over such materials or items of equipment. Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of products being provided to supply power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.



.5 Acceptance of products installed presumes that products have not been damaged or exposed to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy. If in the opinion of the Consultant, products have sustained damage, or have been exposed to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Consultant to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .1 Outlet boxes

.1 Identify outlet boxes on the box cover with: circuits contained in the box, the panels from which they are fed, the voltage and purpose of the outlet.

.2 Cable and conduit

.1 Identify conduits and cables for the various systems by the use of the following distinctive coloured labels. The Labels shall comprise pressure sensitive plastic tape with printing labels indicating the system. Apply a small area of paint to the outside and inside of each outlet box, pull box and panel as it is being installed. Identify junction boxes in suspended ceiling areas with colour on both inside and outside.

.1 120/208 volt system – yellow

.2 347/600 volt system – white

.3 Emergency power - orange

.4 Fire alarm systems – red

.5 Data cabling system – blue

.6 P.A./Telephone systems – grey

.7 Security/Intercom/CATV systems – black

.8 Other telecommunication systems - green

.2 Locate identification labels at follows:

.1 Behind each access.

.2 At each change of direction, at junction boxes, and at both ends of each run.

.3 At not more than 15m apart in straight runs.

.4 Where passing through a wall, partition, and floor. One on each side of wall, partition, and floor.



.3 Cable and conduit labels

.1 For power and lighting system feeders, install labels at either end of the conductors where terminated inside of equipment to match wiring diagram conductor identification or panelboard circuit numbers. Typical identification Panel AA circuit - 21; use "AA-21". For a three phase circuit provide identification on phase A conductor only. For a single phase circuit provide identification on the phase conductor.

.2 For lighting branch circuits identify circuit at panel and in outlet box connection to lighting fixture. Install label on phase conductor tap-off. Typical identification if fixture connected to Panel A, circuit 5; marker identification A-5.

.3 For branch circuits supplying single phase and three phase devices such as receptacles and connections to equipment identify conductors at panel and in device outlet box. Install label on phase conductor inside outlet box. Typical identification if device is connected to Panel B - circuit 14, marker identification "B-14".

.4 For switchboards identify all control conductors at terminal strips inside equipment and where terminated at all remote devices. Identification shall match numbering system on Drawings and "Reviewed" shop drawings.

.5 For miscellaneous systems identify all conductors at terminal strips located in:

.1 Control and/or monitoring panels.

.2 Control and/or monitoring stations.

.3 Local terminal cabinets.

.4 All remote devices.

.5 All connections in the system.

.6 Provide identification in accordance with the numbering system on the "Reviewed" shop drawings.

.4 Equipment nameplates

.1 Provide lamacoid name plates, black background with white engraved letters 0.4" (10 mm) high, for electrical equipment but not limited to panels, switchboards, transformers, disconnect switches, breakers, contactors, relay panels, starters, TVSS, FACP and miscellaneous panels.

.2 Nameplates shall indicate voltage, capacity, upstream, and downstream equipment Typical identification for panel: "Lighting Panel C, 120/208 v, 3 phase, 4 W. Supplied from Panel BB".

.3 Switchboards - Plates to be mounted on face of switchboards. Typical identification for switchboard: "Switchboard AAA - 120/208 V, 3 phase, 4 W". Typical identification for branch feeders: "Power Panel BB".



.4 Install plates after all painting has been completed. Secure with mechanical fastening devices except on the inside of panel doors where gluing will be acceptable.

.5 Power system colour code

.1 Power system phase colour code:

.1 Red - Phase A

.2 Black - Phase B

.3 Blue - Phase C

.4 Neutral - White

.5 Ground - Green.

.2 Identify incoming utility service lines with enamel paint to above colour code.

.3 Band buses in switch board and panels to above colour code.

.4 Provide branch conductor to above colour code.

.6 Manufacturer’s nameplates

.1 Have the manufacturer's nameplates affixed to each item of all equipment showing the size, name of equipment, serial number and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase, horsepower, etc., and the name of the manufacturer and his address. Ensure that all stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is perfectly legible. Ensure that nameplates are not painted over. Where apparatus is to be concealed, attach the nameplate in an approved location on the equipment support or frame.

.2 Ensure that panels and other apparatus which have exposed faces in finished areas do not have any visible trade marks or other identifying symbols. Mount nameplates behind doors.

.7 Signage and marking

.1 Provide signage to local inspection authority on all equipment and electrical rooms.

.2 The suitable warning signs must be installed as per Electrical Safety Code.

.3 Where applicable, provide warning signs for ground fault protection circuit as required by OESC section 68-068.

.4 Where applicable, provide warning signs and marking for the power disconnect switches for fire pumps as per NFPA-20, section 9.3.

.8 Single line distribution drawings

.1 Provide clear acrylic covered framed as-built single line distribution system drawing of the entire project in the main electrical room. Distribution system shall be CAD generated. Size shall be minimum 305 x 460 mm with all text legible. Provide interim drawings until such time that permanent as-built drawings are available for permanent installation.



2.2 WIRES AND CABLES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the followings:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 0.3, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

.2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.131 – Type TECK 90 Cable.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 38, Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 75, Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

.5 CSA C22.2 No. 65, Wire Connectors.

.2 Use copper conductors TWH, 600V, 90°C rated insulation unless otherwise noted.

.3 Use RW90 X-Link, 1000V, minus 40 degree, 90°C rated insulation for 250MCM and larger.

.4 Joints in feeder cables are not permitted.

.5 Except as indicated hereinafter, wire for branch circuits to be #12 AWG except that #10 minimum to be used where the home run exceeds 27m (90’).

.6 Wires for power circuits to be #12 AWG minimum, and for control circuits to be #14 AWG minimum.

.7 Solid conductors of #12AWG and smaller. Stranded conductors for #10 AWG and larger.

.8 For wiring through or in lighting fixtures use type 'GTF' fixture wire, rated 600 volts to meet code requirements for recessed fixtures.

.9 Wire to ceiling outlet boxes on which a lighting fixture is or may be mounted, with conductors having insulation suitable for 90°C.

.10 Cables located in plenum, ceiling or floor spaces shall be totally enclosed in non-combustible conduit or raceway or be armoured cable where permitted by the Ontario Building Code.

.11 Wires and cables for outdoor locations shall be minus 40°C rated.

.12 Armoured cables shall be complete with interlocked aluminum armour, approved fastening and connectors and meet the requirements of Vertical Flame Test-Cables in Cable Tray of CSA C22.2 No. 0.3. The PVC jacket cables (TECK 90 and ACWU90) shall be FT6 rated.

.13 Install all wiring in conduit, unless indicated as armoured. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

.14 Use an approved lubricant to assist in pulling conductors through conduit. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.

.15 Balance the loading on feeders so that unbalanced load is less than 10%.

.16 Limit the voltage drop at the end of feeders and branch circuits to 2% at the rated load of the circuit.



.17 For single conductor armoured cables, where required to conform to the Electrical Safety Code, Rule 12-108, Bulletin 12-7-11.

.18 Lighting fixture wiring in accessible ceiling spaces shall be run in conduit from the lighting panel to ceiling outlet boxes with armoured cable drops no longer than 3.0m (10 ft.) permissible from the boxes to fixtures.

.19 Protect all exposed non-armoured cables in manholes, pull pits and trenches with an approved fire protective fibreglass tape of '3M' manufacture or approved equal. Extend the protective wrapping on the cables where they leave pull pits or trenches below switchgear to the circuit breaker or fused switch terminals. Rack cables in manholes and pull pits to provide clear access for maintenance and servicing.

.20 BX may be used in hollow partitions for receptacles.

2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTING .1 Drawings do not show all raceways. Those shown are generally in diagrammatic

form only.

.2 Conform with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 45, Rigid Metal Conduit.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 56, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 62, Surface Raceways and Lighting Fixture Raceways and Fittings.

.5 CSA C22.2 No. 83, Electrical Metallic Tubing.

.6 CSA C22.2 No. 126, Cable Tray System.

.7 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2, Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.

.8 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 227.3, Flexible Non-metallic Tubing.

.9 CSA C22 No. 18, Outlet Boxes, Conduits Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware.

.3 Conduits

.1 Rigid steel conduit hot dip galvanized inside and outside installed:

.1 On the exterior of building;

.2 Where exposed to mechanical damage;

.3 Where conduits turn up or turn down out of concrete slab;

.4 Damp and wet locations.

.2 Steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) installed:

.1 In partitions;



.2 In ceiling spaces;

.3 In service spaces.

.4 In masonry walls.

.3 Rigid PVC (unplasticized) conduit except for exit light, emergency lighting, and fire alarm system installed:

.1 In slabs with rigid steel galvanized turn-up;

.2 Underground with rigid steel galvanized turn-up;

.3 In concrete walls;

.4 Flexible armoured conduit:

.1 In partitions;

.2 For lighting fixture drops;

.3 From ceiling junction boxes into wall outlets;

.4 Flexible armoured conduits shall be limited to 10'-0" lengths where run horizontally from take-off junction boxes.

.5 Liquid tight flexible conduit

.1 Final connection to motors.

.2 Any equipment which vibrates or generates noise.

.6 For EMT use steel concrete tight set screw fittings as manufactured by T & B or equal. Die cast or pressure cast fittings are not acceptable. For rigid steel conduit use only steel or malleable iron threaded fittings. Threadless, die cast or pressure cast fittings are not acceptable.

.7 ENT might be used where permitted by OESC, provided with mechanical protection as required by OESC.

.8 Provide bushings on the ends of all conduits in enclosure, boxes, panels and cabinets, to protect the conductor installation. Except where grounding bushings are specified use all plastic insulated bushings temperature rating 150°C with double locknuts.

.9 Use PVC conduit for all landscaping locations where conduit comes in contact with soil. Refer to Landscape Drawings for final elevation of planting soil. Co-ordinate and adjust electrical devices accordingly.

.10 Conceal all conduits except in service spaces, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and areas with ceilings.

.11 Install all locknuts and bushings to ensure a secure mechanical and electrical bond. Use Erickson couplings in lieu of running threads.

.12 Where conduit joints occur in concrete, use silicone sealing compound to make water tight.

.13 Lay out conduit to drain free of all moisture.



.14 Securely hold conduits in place in concrete or masonry during pouring and construction operations; provide templates, forms and spacers as necessary.

.15 Support multiple runs of conduit on channel or angle iron with rod hangers.

.16 Secure all conduits in place with conduit clamps T & B or equal. Perforated pipe straps, wire lashings, wood screws or nails are not acceptable.

.17 Provide conduit expansion joints where conduits cross building expansion joints, also in straight runs of conduit 30 m (100') or longer. Conduit expansion joints shall be telescoping sleeve type, with insulated bushings and ground jumper.

.18 Make field bends and offsets uniform and symmetrical without flattening conduit. Minimum bending radius shall be ten (10) times the conduit diameter.

.19 Ream conduit ends to remove burrs and sharp edges. Fit conduit stubs with waterproof plastic caps during installation to protect threads and to prevent entrance of moisture into conduit.

.20 Test all conduits for clear bore using ball mandrel, brushes and snake. Clear any conduit which rejects the ball mandrel. Replace if necessary. Bear all costs involved in making all work good, restoring all surfaces to original condition.

.21 Install a continuous nylon cord 180 kg (400 lb) test in each conduit left empty.

.22 Install a copper ground conductor within the flexible conduit at each connection.

.23 Provide conduit seals in conduits which pass to the outside.

.24 Provide pull boxes, fittings or junction boxes in conduit runs, on the basis of not more than two (2) right angle bends or their equivalent or not more than 30 m (100'), in straight runs between boxes. For outdoor direct buried conduit, up to 50m.

.25 Size conduits to code requirements, provide larger sizes where noted.

.26 Size conduits for low voltage wiring to manufacturer's recommendations.

.27 Provide conduit sealing fittings and correspond for hazardous application to Electrical Safety code requirements.

.28 Maximum conduit size permitted in a concrete slab shall be 35 mm. In any case verify with Structural Consultant for acceptability.

.29 Where multi-conduits parallel run and/or crossover in concrete slab/wall, verify with Structural Consultant for acceptability.



.4 Surface metal raceway

.1 Provide surface raceway as required. The surface metal raceway systems shall consist of surface metal raceway, appropriate fittings and device brackets to complete installation.

.2 The raceway is to be utilized in dry interior locations only as per Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

.3 Submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout of all products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to installation with raceway lengths, device type (power and data), locations and circuits identified, complete with data sheets and samples.

.4 The surface raceway system specified herein for branch circuit wiring and/or data network, voice, video and other low-voltage wiring shall be Hubbell HBL4750 series or Wiremold V4000 Series. The raceway shall be metal, two-piece design with a base and a snap-on cover. The raceway shall be complete with one integral barrier in the base for power/data separation. Power shall be in top; data in the bottom. Finish shall be ivory unless otherwise noted.

.5 For individual devices located on surfaces where conduit cannot be recessed provide single or double channel raceway system products.

.6 Receptacle / Data plates shall be Wiremold V4047 series, or equaled by Hubbell.

.7 Exposed raceway in finish area (not in service spaces, mechanical/Electrical room, ceiling, etc) shall be: Hubbell HBL500 series or Wiremold V700, ivory finish.

.5 Install raceways system complete with appropriate fittings such as connectors, bushings, elbows, couplings, locknuts, expansion fittings, fasteners and supports and accessories supplied as integral parts of assembly, as specified. Installation shall comply with Regulatory Authorities requirements.

.6 Neatly install exposed raceway running parallel to and at right angles to building lines and equally spaced in groups.

.7 Keep raceway ends parallel and on proper spacing to suit knockouts or raceway openings in equipment or enclosure.

.8 Keep raceways at least 150 mm clear of heating pipes, flues and hot item surfaces. Where required clearance cannot be provided, obtain written approval from engineer to alter layout or to reduce clearance.

.9 Provide expansion couplings, with bonding jumper and ground clamps where raceways cross building control joints.



.10 Use only metallic, enclosed raceway on installation that required shielding of electrical cables or where installed in ceiling used as return air plenum, as specified or indicated on Drawings.

.11 Raceways shall have established positive low resistance paths to ground and effectively isolate conductors so that any short-circuit arc is confined.

.12 Select appropriate fittings, such as grounding bushings, bonding and grounding straps, to maintain continuity and effectiveness of grounding of raceway system.

.13 Provide necessary fasteners and supports acceptable for type and size of raceways, to ensure rigid, complete assembly.

.14 Provide suitable inserts or expansion type machine bolts for fastening raceways, fittings, boxes and equipment to concrete surfaces.

.15 Do not use wood screws, lag screws, expansion shields, rawl plugs and nylon inserts.

.16 Secure raceway and other associate work to structure members. Raceway shall not be supported from ceiling suspension system.

.17 Thoroughly clean raceway and dry clear obstructions before pulling cable or wire.

.18 Minimum raceway size: 16mm (1/2”) conduit equivalent system.

2.4 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES .1 Comply with the requirements of latest edition of the followings:

.1 CSA Standard C22.2 No.18, Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.2 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 85, Rigid PVC Boxes and Fittings.

.2 Outlet and conduit boxes - general

.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

.2 102mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

.4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

.5 347V outlet boxes for 347V switching devices.

.6 Combination ganged boxes with appropriate steel removable barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

.7 Where standard make boxes are not suitable, provide boxes of special design to fit space and other requirements.

.8 Where vapour proof lighting is specified, provide matching vapour proof ceiling or wall junction boxes and fittings as required.

.3 Sheet steel outlet boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38mm or as indicated. 102mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.



.2 Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48mm.

.3 102mm square or octagonal outlet boxes complete with steel fixture studs where supporting lighting fixtures. Die cast fittings not permitted.

.4 102mm square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for lush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile walls.

.4 Masonry boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized stamped steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls, minimum size 95x 50 x 64mm standard and 102 x 57 x 61mm for 347V.

.5 Concrete boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized stamped steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.

.6 Conduit boxes

.1 Cast FS or FD aluminium, or feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacles.

.2 PVC FS or FD boxes or PVC conduit where required in special corrosive areas as indicated on Drawing.

.7 Fittings - general

.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

.8 Installation

.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

.3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come with 6 mm of opening.

.4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washer are not allowed.

.5 Size and install appropriate boxes and enclosures in accordance with applicable section(s) of Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code and manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

.6 Co-ordinate location and installation of boxes so as to be accessible and clear from building system equipment, etc.

.7 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.



.8 Use pull boxes for conduits larger than 35mm. Use conduit outlet bodies for conduit 35mm.

.9 Provide approved hole plugs in unused conduit knockouts and openings.

.10 Furnish boxes and enclosures with corrosion resistant machine screws.

.11 Boxes and enclosures embedded in concrete for flush mounting, shall be secured properly with connecting conduits and related works set in place before concrete is poured. Forms, when used, shall be able to be removed without disturbing installed boxes or enclosures.

.12 Ensure junction and outlet boxes mounted in ceiling cavities do not interfere with removal of ceiling tiles.

.13 Use masonry boxes for flush mounting in exposed block walls, concrete boxes for flush mounting in concrete wall.

.14 Furnish conduit boxes with neoprene gaskets for outdoor area or hazardous area application.

.15 Install all wall boxes for door security access devices, fire alarm devices, etc., adjacent to lock side of door openings unless otherwise shown. Check door swing before installing any switch.

.16 Install all boxes in walls so that tapped holes for mounting wiring devices or fixtures will be aligned vertically or horizontally, as required. Where boxes are grouped at one location with common and varying mounting heights, align boxes horizontally and vertically from centre line unless otherwise indicated.

.17 Offset outlet boxes in sound attenuating partitions to avoid undue transmission of sound between the partition elements. Use flexible conduit connections where wiring is required between outlet boxes on opposite sides of partition.

.18 Offset outlet boxes where installed on either side of a fire separation.

.19 Where steel supports are required for outlet boxes, wood supports are not acceptable.

.20 Maintain integrity of vapour barriers along building perimeter wall where flush outlet boxes are required.

2.5 CONTACTORS .1 Conform to the requirements of latest edition of CSA C22.2, No. 14 – Industrial

Control Equipment.

.2 Provide enclosed lighting contactors for all lighting control and other non-motor loads. The contactors shall be fully rated and withstand the large initial in-rush currents of lamps without contact welding.

.3 Contactors shall be NEMA rated, magnetic, electrically operated, mechanically held, complete with suitable type enclosure and 120V coil.

.4 Fail open: contacts shall open upon the supply voltage drop below 75% of the rated voltage.



.5 Accessories

.1 Pilot lights (ON/OFF).

.2 On/Off/Auto selector switch.

.3 Auxiliary contacts (NO and NC) and relays to match control function.

.4 Control circuit fuse-holders and fuses.

.5 Control transformers in each 347/600V enclosed contactor. Transformer shall be 120V secondary and furnished with primary and secondary fuses. Bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.

.6 Manufacturers:

.1 Cutler-Hammer.

.2 Schneider.

.3 Siemens.

.7 Mount contactors at 1500 mm AFF to operating handle/pushbutton.

2.6 PHOTO-ELECTRIC CONTROLS .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the follows:

.1 CSA-C22.2 No. 55, Special Use Switches.

.2 Outdoor photo-electric controls .1 Photo-electric controls shall be weatherproof, temperature compensated and

shock and vibration resistant. Turn-on action shall be adjustable from 1.5 to 5.5 fc. Turn-off is adjustable and approximately three (3) times turn-on.

.2 Photo-electric control delay of up to 2 minutes prevents false switching due to temporary flashes of light. Contacts shall be 1800VA, 120volt, single pole and shall fail in ‘ON’ position.

.3 Photo-electric control shall be Tork #2001 Series or approved equal, and complete with B-Bracket for wall mount of the photo-electric control.

2.7 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS .1 All access panels and doors to be Milcor or Bel, 12 gauge with concealed hinges.

.2 In glazed tile walls provide #304 alloy stainless steel with #4 finish recessed frame and secured with stainless steel countersunk flush head screws.

.3 In plaster surfaces provide dished steel door for plaster finish with welded metal lath and plastic grommet for keyhole.

.4 In other finishes use plain steel door with lock and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat.

.5 In lay-in ceilings, tiles properly marked may serve as access panels.



.6 Provide the appropriate Division of Work with panels and doors, complete with frames and all pertinent information for installation. Arrange and pay for that Division to install them. Ensure that all panels and doors are flush mounted and properly aligned with building modules and grids. Indicate locations on record drawings.

.7 Select all access panels and doors to provide adequate access, and to suit appropriate architectural finish, minimum size 150 mm x 150 mm (6" x 6"). Where necessary for persons to enter, provide minimum 600 mm x 450 mm (24" x 18") size doors.

2.8 SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT .1 Provide all equipment in sprinklered areas with accessories to prevent the entry of

water into the enclosures in the event that the sprinkler system is activated.

.2 Materials

.1 CSA enclosure type 2.

.2 Louvres facing outward and downward where openings are required for heat dissipation. Expanded metal screening is not acceptable.

.3 CSA certified sealing rings for rigid steel galvanized conduit and CSA certified raintight connectors for steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or other raceways as required.

.3 Provide seal rings and raintight connectors on all conduit terminations entering the top or side of all enclosures and for all conduit terminations for pull boxes, junction boxes, splitter troughs, wireways, auxiliary gutters, cable troughs and disconnect switches installed below the level of the sprinkler heads.

.4 Refer to Mechanical Drawings for extent of sprinklered areas.

2.9 BACKBOARDS .1 Provide backboards for all surface mounted power distribution equipment. Provide

backboards for telecommunication systems as indicated.

.2 Backboards shall be minimum 0.76” (19mm) thick, good one (1) side fire retardant plywood backboards, pressure impregnated with fire retardant chemicals, and stamp. Conform to CSA 080. Plywood shall be FSC Certified.

.3 Construct each backboard in a rectangular shape of the size as indicated. Where no size is indicated, provide a backboard a minimum 4” (100mm) higher than the equipment. Where more than one (1) piece of equipment is installed on the backboard, construct the backboard of a size to suit the maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions of the equipment. Backboards for Telecommunication system shall be minimum 4” (W) x 8” (H).

.4 Finish each backboard with one (1) coat of primer followed by a minimum of one (1) finish fire retardant coat of ASA 61 grey paint prior to installing any equipment.



.5 Fastenings:

.1 Fasten each backboard to a wall or to a support structure using cadmium plated hardware. Provide a flat washer under the head of each fastener. Recess the head of the mounting bolt where equipment, including future equipment, is to be installed.

.2 Use expansion shields, toggle bolts or other types of wall fastenings to suit the wall type. Align the mounting bolts with the wall studs for stud type walls.

.3 Install fastenings a maximum 20” (500mm) apart in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

.4 When installing equipment heavier than 50kg, fasten the equipment through the backboard directly to the wall or support structure.

2.10 METALS .1 Metal construction required for the electrical work shown on the structural drawings

will be carried out by Division 5.

.2 Provide all other electrical work such as, but not limited to, equipment bases, supports, catwalks, framework to support checker plates and electrical equipment above trenches and cable pits, ladders, etc. pit and trench covers, and as called for on the Electrical Drawings. Have such work carried out in accordance with the requirements of Division 5.

2.11 SLEEVES AND CURBS .1 Provide conduit sleeves of galvanized steel for conduit and cable runs passing

through concrete walls, beams, slabs and floor. Cut flush with finished surface.

.2 Extend galvanized conduit sleeves for conduit rising through slabs 4" minimum above finished floors.

.3 Through exterior walls below grade waterproofed floors, and other waterproof walls use heavy weight cast iron pipes machine cut. Extend sleeves 100 mm (4") above finished floors, and cut flush with underside of floor.

.4 For rectangular duct openings for bus ducts and cable tray use minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel sleeves or provide a removable wood box-out of the required size. Brace sleeves to retain their position and shape during the pouring of concrete and other work.

.5 Seal sleeves and openings to maintain fire rating. Use Dow-Corning #3-6548 `Silicone RTV' foam, Thomas & Betts `Flamesafe' firestop system, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.

.6 Seal all openings and sleeves after installation of equipment:

.1 With an approved material to maintain fire rating where sleeves and openings pass through fire separations and floors.



.2 With an approved material to maintain fire rating for sleeves and openings provided for future equipment.

.7 Size sleeves to provide 13 mm (1/2") clearance all around.

.8 Provide all flashing and waterproofing for sleeves through roof and exterior walls to the requirements of Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

.9 Except where furred in provide watertight concrete curbs, 100 mm (4") high by 100 mm (4") wide with 19 mm (3/4") chamfered edges around all sleeves and openings passing through waterproof floors.

2.12 SUPPORTS AND BASES .1 Submit proposed method of attachment of hangers and beam clamps, to cellular

steel deck for approval before proceeding with Work.

.2 Supply and erect special structural Work required for the installation of electrical equipment. Provide anchor bolts and other fastenings unless noted otherwise. Mount equipment required to be suspended above floor level, where details are not shown, on a frame or platform bracketed from the wall or suspended from the ceiling. Carry supports to either the ceiling or the floor, or both as required, at locations where, because wall thickness is inadequate, it is not permitted to use such brackets.

.3 Electrical panels, switches or other electrical equipment shall be complete with suitable bases or mounting brackets.

.4 Provide channel or other metal supports where necessary, to adequately support lighting fixtures. Do not use wood unless wood forms part of the building structure.

.5 Secure supports, in general to structure, from inserts in concrete construction or from building structural steel beams, using beam clamps. Provide additional angle or channel steel members, required between beams for supporting conduits and cables.

.6 Provide any additional supports required from existing concrete construction for any piping or equipment, by drilling same and installing expansion bolt cinch anchors.

.7 Do not use explosive drive pins in any section of Work without obtaining prior approval.

.8 Hangers for electrical conduit shall be galvanized after fabrication. Conduit hangers shall be as manufactured by:

• Burndy Canada Ltd. • Canadian Strut Products Ltd. • E. Myatt & Co. Ltd. • Steel City Electric Co. • Pilgrim • Thomas & Betts



• B-line

.9 Do not use, perforated strapping (grappler bars).

.10 Steel supports in wet or dry locations to be galvanized after fabrication.

.11 Provide concrete housekeeping pads or bases for all floor mounted equipment 100 mm (4") high with 19 mm (3/4") chamfered edges, keyed to the floor slab and extending at least 100 mm (4") on all sides of the equipment. Where draw-out truck type circuit breakers are provided extend pad to accommodate complete withdrawal of breaker. Provide and set all anchor bolts.

.12 Use only factory made threaded or toggle type insert.

.13 Place inserts only in structural members and not in the finishing material.

.14 Provide bus ducts, cable trays, and wireways with fire barriers at each floor level and fire separation.

.15 Provide locations and dimensions for all pads and curbs and provide and set all anchor bolts for all concrete work provided under Division 3, Concrete.

2.13 SPARE PARTS .1 Furnish spare parts and maintenance materials as recommended by the equipment

manufacturer and as appropriate for a period of two (2) years after acceptance of the Work.

2.14 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM .1 Provide emergency call system in barrier-free washrooms, and as noted. The

system shall be GE Healthcare StaffCall Pro system or approved equal. System shall include the following: .1 GE Model NPD55-A-D, Polyvinyl Pull Cord Station .2 GE Model LC1-C-D, Corridor Lamp .3 GE Model LC44-C, Dome Light plus Buzzer .4 GE Model PS24, 24 Volt Power Supply .5 All power and signal wiring in conduit required for a fully operational system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 NEUTRALS AND PHASING .1 Provide one (1) identified grounded neutral conductor for each set of branch circuits

connected to different mains of each panel.

.2 For circuits identified as computer dedicated (D) or isolated ground (IG), provide individual neutral per identified circuit.

.3 Install a separate neutral for each GFCI circuit when the GFCI is located at the panelboard.



.4 Connect two or three (2 or 3) circuits sharing a common neutral to different mains or phases.

.5 Balance the connected loads across the mains of each panel to within 15%.

.6 Circuit numbers on the panels must correspond to the numbers on the Drawings.

.7 Connections in all equipment to be Phase A, B and C from left to right, and front to back when viewing from the front or accessible direction.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .1 Mounting heights are from floor level to centre line of device outlet, unless noted

otherwise. Confirm all locations before installation. In all areas accessible to persons in wheelchairs , the mounting heights of all switches, thermostats, intercom switches, pull stations, etc., required by Building Code “Barrier Free” shall comply with Code requirements.

.2 The mounting heights of all power and lighting devices shall comply with Ontario Electrical Safety Code requirements.

.3 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

.4 Install electrical equipment at following heights (centre of device) unless indicated otherwise.

.1 Wall switches, dimmers, timers, speed controllers, speaker volume controllers, thermostats and hand dryers: 1200 mm.

.2 Wall receptacles: • General: 450mm • Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 250 mm minimum. • Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 250 mm. • In sevice rooms: 1200 mm. (gang with switch)

.3 Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated.

.4 Telephone, TV and data outlets: 450mm

.5 Door bell pushbuttons and door open push buttons: 1200 mm.

.6 Security key switches, card readers and intercom switches: 1200mm.

.7 Security wall-mounted motion sensor: 150mm below ceiling or 2300mm.

3.3 WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Co-ordinate all the work with Division 15. The locations of starters, motors and

associated equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate and diagrammatic only. Co-ordinate with the work of the Division 15 Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.



.2 Provide all electric baseboard heaters, cabinet heaters, force flow unit heaters and heating cables. Division 15 shall provide electric duct heaters.

.3 Provide safety disconnect switches required at motors by OESC whether shown on the drawings or not. Provide power wires and connections to all mechanical equipment.

.4 All the motor starters/controllers, and/or line voltage thermostats shall be supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 16. Division 16 shall provide safety disconnect switches and power connections to the motors. Div. 15 shall provide all the control wiring, control devices and low voltage thermostats.

.5 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, provide suitable plywood backboard to which all such equipment shall be secured.

.6 Where the single-phase exhaust fan shall be controlled by manual switch, Division 16 shall provide power connections to the fan, heavy-duty toggle control switch and provide the safety disconnect means.

.7 Wiring and connections from fire alarm system to motor starters/control panels for motor control operations. Co-ordinate with Division 15.

.8 Where applicable, power supplies to MCC. Div 15 will provide MCC, main lugs, power supplies and controls to motors.

3.4 SERVICES TO EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OWNER / OTHER DIVISIONS .1 Provide all necessary connections required for equipment supplied by the Owner

and other Divisions. Examine all Drawings and Specifications and identify all requirements.

.2 Verify the type, rating and location of all outlets and/or connections required for all equipment provided by the Owner and other Divisions.

.3 Provide isolation devices as required to the equipment for all services.

3.5 PROVISION FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION .1 Spaces designated for future equipment or building expansion shall be left clear.

.2 Provide services for future extensions complete with Products necessary for present termination and to permit future extension.

.3 Identify each service by a permanent marker at its termination point.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Provide all cutting and patching required for the Work of Division 16. Work shall be

carried out in conformance with the requirements of Division 2. Include any radiography required to locate concealed services before penetrating into inaccessible locations.



.2 Any modifications to building shall be done so as not to diminish structural, fire resistance, or smoke barrier integrity.

.3 Proposed modifications to structure shall require acceptance by the Structural Engineer.

.4 Consultant shall be afforded the opportunity to review the intent prior to any major cutting.

3.7 PAINTING .1 Provide all exposed ferrous metal work, and Products, except conduit, with at least

one (1) factory prime coat or paint one prime coat on site. Clean up or wire brush all equipment before painting. Unless otherwise noted finish painting will be done under Division 9, Finishes of these Specifications.

.2 If not factory coated, clean, wire brush and paint all ferrous supports and hangers concealed in ceiling spaces of kitchens or other similar high humidity areas. Do not paint galvanized supports and hangers.

.3 Repaint or refinish all damaged factory applied finishes.

.4 Provide oil base red oxide primer applied as per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.8 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL .1 Spring type vibration isolations shall be complete with horizontal spring constant (kH)

to vertical (kV) ratio between one and two to assure stability. Select springs to operate no greater than 2/3 solid deflection. For indoor mounting use springs with one (1) coat of zinc chromate primer and two (2) coats of paint. For outdoor mounting use springs of neoprene coated steel or stainless steel. All spring housings to be hot dipped galvanized. Where the spring assembly is bolted to the floor provide vibration isolation washers and pads to reduce transmission of vibration.

.2 Pad type isolators shall be rubber for indoor application, neoprene for oil filled devices and for outdoor use. Use 30 durometer rubber and 50 durometer neoprene. Select pad type isolators which do not exceed the mid-point of their recommended operating rate with maximum deflection of 20% of thickness. Use minimum 6 mm (1/4") thick pads under spring assemblies.

.3 Provide spring type vibration isolators for IC engine driven equipment. Raise equipment to operating height, levelled with blocks and shims so that connections can be made to a rigid system at operating level before isolator adjustments.

.4 For power class transformers provide spring or pad type isolators in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where dry type transformers are contained within unit substation enclosures mount the core and coils to the structural framing of the unit substation. Locate isolators between core and coil frame and unit substation structural frame.



.5 Provide pad type isolators for all floor mounted dry type distribution transformers. Locate isolators between transformer enclosure and floor.

.6 Where transformers are platform mounted from structure above provide spring hangers with levelling devices and sound pads in all supports.

.7 Make connections to rotating, vibrating, magnetic or other noise producing equipment such as motors, transformers, and between independent structure by means of loop flexible conduits.

.8 If objectionable noise or vibration should be transmitted to occupied portions of the building by any part of the electrical work, make necessary changes and/or additions, to the Consultant's approval, without addition to the contract price.

3.9 CONCRETE .1 Concrete work shown on the structural drawings will be done as part of Division 3,

Concrete of these Specifications.

.2 Provide all other concrete work necessary for the Work of this Division. Have such work carried out in accordance with Division 3, Concrete of these Specifications.

3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING .1 Before commencement of excavation of the Work, determine with the Consultant,

the municipalities and utilities, the presence of existing underground services at the site and verify satisfactory condition. Locate such services and mark out same. Ensure that all trades concerned are aware of their presence.

.2 Do all excavation and backfilling up to grade required for the electrical work inside and outside of building. Check available soil test reports. Obtain instructions of the Consultant regarding the type of soils and their extent.

.3 Carry out all trench excavation in strict conformity with all applicable acts and bylaws.

.4 Excavate to the required depth and width. Backfill excess excavation.

.5 For direct buried cable in all soil conditions excavate to 150 mm (6") below and a minimum of 200 mm (8") to either side of the cable run. Fill back with a bedding of granular 'A' gravel or sand.

.6 Provide ducts under roads and paved areas.

.7 Refer to details and to Utility Company requirements for concrete encased duct installations.

.8 Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any footing, provide a sleeve at the proximity and backfill with 14,000 kPa (2,000 psi) concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Proximity is determined by the angle of repose as established by the Consultant.



.9 Protect the bottom of excavations against flooding and freezing. Use pumping or other means to keep bottom dry. Do not open more than weather will permit. Have excavations inspected at least once a week by authorities. Break up rocks and boulders and remove these by drilling and wedging. Do not use blasting unless approved in writing by the Consultant.

.10 Compact all backfill to a density of 95% Modified Proctor. Before backfilling, obtain approval. Remove all shoring during backfilling. Obtain approval for all compaction machines used.

.11 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand in individual layers of maximum 150 mm (6") thickness. Manually compact the first layers up to a compacted level of 300 mm (12”). Machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.12 Backfill trenches outside buildings, not under roads, parking lots, or traffic areas, manually compact up to a compacted level of 450 mm (18") above the cable or duct bank with individual layers of material up to 150 mm (6") thick, using sand or granular 'A' gravel. Machine compact the balance up to grade with 150 mm (6") layers of approved excavated material.

.13 Backfill all other trenches outside buildings with granular 'A' gravel in layers not exceeding 150 mm (6") thickness, up to grade level; manually compact up to 450 mm (18"), machine compact the balance.

.14 Do not use water for consolidation or during compaction of backfill, unless approved in writing by the Consultant.

.15 After a period has passed adequate to reveal any settlement fill all depressions to correct grade level with appropriate material, machine compacted. Pay all costs required to make good all damage caused by settlement.

.16 Store and dispose of excavated materials as follows:

.1 During the progress of the contract place the material as directed in such a manner that a minimum of damage or disfigurement of the existing ground will result and the material will not in any way impede the progress of the work. Dispose of surplus material as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Place surplus topsoil separately from subsoil. Leave the site clear and unencumbered.

.3 Protect, brace, support as required existing pipes, ducts, cables, etc. encountered in the work. Do not disturb or interrupt the operation of any services without written approval from the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16140 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 4 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Wiring Devices


PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and section 16010 – Electrical general requirements.

.3 Provide all switches, receptacles, wiring devices, coverplates as required to complete the installation.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CSA-C22.2 No.42, General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Wiring Devices.

.2 CSA-C22.2 No.42.1, Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.

.3 CSA-C22.2 No.55, Special Use Switches.

.4 CSA-C22.2 No.111, General-Use Snap Switches.

.5 CSA-C22.2 No. 144, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 –

Electrical General Requirements.

1.4 MANUFACTURER .1 Wiring devices shall be manufactured by 1) Hubbell; 2) Pass & Seymour; 3) Bryant.

Catalogue numbers are referred below to indicate quality standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES .1 Switches shall be with following features:

.1 White premium specification grade, quiet type.

.2 Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.

.3 Silver alloy contacts.

.4 Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking.

.5 Suitable for back and side wiring.

.6 Fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps.



.2 Switches for 120 Volt lighting circuits

.1 Hubbell CSB115W, CSB315W and CSB415W, 15 ampere for single pole, three-way and four-way switching as required for the application.

.3 Switches for motor or other control applications shall be horsepower rated, Hubbell, HBL7832D and HBL7810D 30Ampere for double-pole and three-pole for one application.

2.2 RECEPTACLES .1 Receptacles shall be with following features:

.1 White premium specification grade, urea moulded housing.

.2 Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.

.3 Break off links for use as split receptables.

.4 Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws.

.5 Triple wipe contacts and riveted grounding contacts.

.6 Impact-resistant nylon face.

.7 U-ground.

.8 GFCI receptacles shall meet UL 943 requirements and be complete with self test and reset buttons, and LED indication light.

.2 Duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, BR15WHI (CSA 5-15R).

.3 Duplex receptacle, 20 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, our, Hubbell, BR20WHI (CSA 5-20RA).

.4 GFCI duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, GFST15W (CSA 5-15R).

.5 GFCI duplex receptacle, 20 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, GF20STW (CSA 5-20RA).

.6 Isolated ground receptacle, orange, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, IG5262 (CSA 5-15R).

.7 Single 30 amp, 120 volt, 1 phases, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, HBL9308 (CSA 5-30R).

.8 Single 30 amp, 120/208 volt, 2 phases, 3 pole, 4 wire, Hubbell, HBL9430A (CSA 14-30R).

.9 Single 50 amp, 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt, 2 phases, 3 pole, 4 wire, Hubbell, HBL9450A (CSA 14-50R).

.10 TVSS duplex receptacle, Gray, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, HBL5262GYWSA (CSA5-15R).

.11 Tamper-resistant duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, BR15WHITR (CSA5-15R).



.12 Weather-resistant duplex receptacle, 15 amp, 120 volt, 1 phase, 2 pole, 3 wire, Hubbell, BR15WHIWR (CSA5-15R).

2.3 COVER PLATES .1 Stainless steel type 302, complete with matching screw.

.2 Weatherproof covers shall be while-in-use type polycarbonate body, cover and plates, conform to NEMA3R. Hubbell # WP826MP.

.3 Sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.

.4 Weatherproof spring-loaded cast aluminum cover plates complete with gaskets for single receptacles or switches.

.5 Water-tight hinged cover suitable for floor box for ganged receptacles, data/telephone outlets, finish to Consultant’s directions.

2.4 DIMMERS .1 Slide dimmers, decorative type, white finish and cover plate shall match wall lighting

switch.

.2 Preset ON/OFF switches and LED indicator.

.3 Minimum 1000W rating for incandescent lamp.

.4 Minimum 10A rating for fluorescent ballast and/or low voltage transformer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.

.2 Install devices in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location. When supplied from different voltages or power sources, provide metal barriers in the ganged box.

.3 Clean debris from outlet boxes.

.4 Install devices plumb and level.

.5 Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

.6 Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

.7 Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

.8 Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

.9 Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.



END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16400 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 4 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Service


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This Section of the Specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and

shall be read accordingly.

.2 Comply with general condition, Supplementary conditions of the contract, section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements

1.2 SCOPE .1 Electrical contractor to include fees for all inspection and/or testing as required by

Electrical Safety Authority.

.2 Warning signs shall be fastened to each piece of apparatus as may be required by Hydro and Electrical Safety Authority.

.3 Obtain the approval from Hydro and the Electrical Safety Authority on complete service.

.4 Retain a testing company to carry out coordination and short circuit study, arc flash hazard study and calculation, testing and checking as listed herein. Provide correction and maintenance on the system to direction of the testing and checking results.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit all required documentation to ESA for approval.

.2 Submit the co-ordination study for review to:

.1 Consultant.

.2 Inspection Authority, if required.

.3 Following completion of all inspection, testing and commissioning, submit a report prepared by the testing company to include but not limited to:

.1 All results recorded and referenced to the various sections of the electrical systems.

.2 Comments and recommendations where variations occur to the co-ordination study or accepted testing and performance values.

.3 Thermal photography where abnormal heating conditions are indicated and repeated photographs following correction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM COORDINATION AND SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY .1 Retain the services of an approved testing company to perform protective

co-ordination study to establish optimum settings and selections for all protective devices. Provide system coordination study and short circuit study for HV switchgears and cables, power transformer, LV switchgears and cables, and emergency generator system.

.2 The study shall illustrate:

.1 Study single line diagrams, showing steady-state and transient values.

.2 Three phase bolted fault current, symmetrical and asymmetrical, and minimal arcing ground fault values.

.3 Time-current characteristics curves of all pertinent relays, breakers, fuses, etc.

.4 Thermal damage curves for cable, transformers, motors and the like.

.5 Summation chart showing all ratings and settings referenced to the appropriate time-current characteristic curve.

.3 Provide all circuit breakers and protective devices with relays, trip settings, frame sizes and short circuit withstand ratings as determined from the co-ordination study.

.4 Acceptable testing companies:

.1 Brosz and Associates

.2 G.T. Woods

.3 Cutler-Hammer

.4 Schneider

.5 Siemens

3.2 ARC FLASH PROTECTION .1 Retain the services of an approved testing company to perform arc flash hazard

study and calculation for all switchboards, panel boards, transformer, panels, control panels, MCC, meters, disconnect switches, breakers, etc, that require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

.2 The study and calculation shall meet IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.



.3 Provide arc flash report to include the following, but not limited to:

.1 Results of the study and calculation.

.2 Detailed hazard/risk category (0 to 5).

.3 Voltage shock hazard, incident current and energy.

.4 Flash protection boundary and shock approach boundaries.

.5 The protection plan including safe work procedures, preventive maintenance programs, personal protective equipment, etc. The protection plan shall meet CSA Z462-08, workplace electrical safety.

.4 Based on the arc flash report, provide required labels state the existence of arc flash hazard and the corrective action to take. The labels must meet ANSI Z535.4-2002, product Safety signs and Labels.

3.3 INSPECTION AND TEST .1 Systems, equipment and all major items required in coordination study shall be

tested to the satisfaction of the Consultant, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Have the testing company retained for the co-ordination study carry out pre-service and in-service testing and checking as listed herein.

.3 The Owner reserves the right to retain, on his behalf, an independent testing company to witness the testing and to provide duplicate verification tests and any additional tests deemed necessary to ensure safety and proper operation of the system. Co-operate in every respect with the Owner's testing company and provide assistance as required to permit him to carry out his work.

.4 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials Conductors which are found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.5 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following:

.1 Visual inspections to ensure there are no obvious defects and determine adherence to allowable manufacturing tolerance and compliance with manufacturer's recommended installation requirements.

.2 Proper operation tests of all systems and devices.

.3 Insulation tests and torque tests. High potential tests where recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Test of all adjustable electrical protective devices of switchgear to establish calibration and operation in accordance with specifications and approved co-ordination curves.

.5 Calibration setting, and test-tripping, of all protective relays and devices, using "Primary-injection" equipment, in accordance with approved co-ordination schedule.



.6 Grounding tests and phasing inspections.

.7 Test of all alarm devices and contacts.

.8 Inspections after system is energized shall include infrared thermographic examination of current carrying parts in switchgear, transformers, busways and all bolted connections for feeders. Submit a written report on the infra-red testing.

.9 The Contractor shall cooperate with Inspection personnel, open all equipment enclosures to permit inspection, and make good defective conditions.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16410 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 3 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Grounding


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This section of specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and


.2 Comply with general conditions, supplementary conditions of the contract, and section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements.

.3 Provide all grounding to comply with the Ontario Electrical Safety Code and the latest instructions of the Inspection Authority, with any further requirements as noted herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .4 All grounding conductors stranded copper, bare or insulated as required.

.5 All grounding conductors stranded copper, bare or insulated as required.

.6 Use Cadweld process for all weld connections. Burndy and/or AMP of Canada Ltd. mechanical grounding connectors are an acceptable equivalent to welded connections.

.7 All ground connectors to be designed and approved for grounding purposes.

.8 Ground buses – 7 mm x 40 mm, 305 mm long or as required.

.9 Ground electrodes - 3040 mm x 20 mm copper clad steel ground rods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Provide ground busses in the main electrical room for use in bonding equipment

in the room. Ground the buses per Electrical Safety Code. Provide ground connections from buses to main low voltage switchboards and all exposed metal work. Provide ground connections to the main water supply pipe.

.2 Connect the ground bus inside the switchgear assembly to the grounding system.

.3 Inside main secondary switchboard, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus with conductor rated minimum 25% main bus rating.

.4 Connect each transformer neutral to main ground bus in main electrical room with separate protected ground conductor to electrical safety code requirements.

.5 Connect the ground bus in each emergency distribution panel to the grounding system. Connect generator to the grounding system.



.6 Bond all interior non-electrical metallic piping systems to the electrical system ground including, but not limited to, water supply, wastewater, and gas systems.

.7 Bond all conduit, and all non-current carrying metal parts, equipment cases, frames, bases, brackets, etc.

.8 Bond each piece of fixed equipment back to the switchboard or panel feeding that equipment, by one of the following methods:

.1 Where equipment is fed by a steel conduit, provided sizing is adequate, utilize conduit for the ground return conductor. At switchboard provide a grounding bushing, and strap such conduits to the ground bus (size per Code).

.2 Where the size of the conduit is inadequate (per Code), or if the conduit is flexible, install a separate insulated copper ground inside the conduit. At the switchboard or distribution panel, provide a grounding bushing, loop the ground conductor through the bushing, and connect to the switchboard ground bus. At the fixed equipment, connect to an internal ground bus, or connect to the inside of the metal enclosure utilizing approved screws and connectors (remove all paint).

.3 For branch circuits, the conduits may be used for grounding, provided seamless steel fittings are used on EMT and threaded fittings are used on rigid conduit. At each receptacle connect a stranded copper ground wire from the outlet box to the grounding terminal on the receptacle. Install a separate grounding conductor in all PVC conduits.

.4 Where equipment is fed by a multi-conductor power cable, provide a ground conductor in the cable. At the switchboard or panel, connect to the ground bus. Use a grounding connector on the cable for positive grounding of the metallic sheath. Loop the ground wire to the grounding connector.

.9 Run a separate ground wire in all flexible conduits. Connect each end to ground bus or lug or connector.

.10 Where mechanical protection is required for insulated grounding conductors install in rigid conduit. Use rigid PVC conduit in concrete or below grade slab and aluminum conduit in other locations.

.11 Provide weld connection or mechanical grounding connectors for:

.1 All connections between grounding conductors.

.2 All connections to building steel.

.3 All connections between grounding conductors and cable lugs.

.12 Where single ground conductor is in one conduit, the conduit must be non-ferrous.

.13 Arrange grounding to provide the minimum impedance paths for ground fault currents. Provide any additional grounding required for approval by the inspecting authorities.



.14 All low voltage neutral ‘XO’ of the transformer shall be bonded to the transformer enclosure/frame with a minimum conductor sized as per Ontario Electrical Safety Code, Table 16.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16440 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 3 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Panelboards


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide factory assembled panelboards as herein specified and as shown on the Electrical Drawings.

.4 Refer to the Electrical Drawings for: voltage; phase; size and type of mains; size, type and quantity of the branch devices; location; surface or flush mounting.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the following:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 29 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 5 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 4 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.



.2 Shop drawings shall include electrical details and dimensions of panel, branch circuit device (breaker and switch) type, quantity and ampacity.

1.4 MANUFACTURERS .1 The manufacturer of the panelboards shall be the manufacturer of the major

components within the assembly, including circuit breakers and fusible switches.

.2 Product of one manufacturer for entire project. Acceptable manufacturers are:

.1 Cutler-Hammer.

.2 Schneider.

.3 Siemens.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RATINGS .1 Panelboards rated 120/208 volt AC shall have short-circuit rating as shown on the

Drawing, but not less than 10 kA RMS symmetrical.



.2 Panelboards rated 347/600 volt AC shall have short-circuit rating as shown on the Drawing, but not less than 14 kA RMS symmetrical.

.3 Panelboards shall be labeled with the short-circuit rating.

.4 Where series ratings are applied, provide the labels in accordance with the requirements of Electrical Safety Code. The labels shall state but not limited to:

.1 Size and type of upstream devices;

.2 Branch devices that can be used;

.3 Short-circuit rating.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION .1 Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices.

.2 Enclosure:

.1 Indoor dry locations: CSA type 1.

.2 Indoor sprinkler locations: CSA type 2.

.3 Outdoor locations: CSA type 3R.

.3 Provide doors with concealed hinges, combined locks and latches for all panelboards except fusible disconnect switch type distribution panelboards.

.4 Two (2) keys for each panelboard and key all panelboards alike.

.5 Interior trim shall be dead-front construction to shield user from energized parts.

.6 Main bus shall be tin finished high quality copper and extend the full length of the panel. Ground bus shall be sized to accommodate branch circuit grounding conductors. 200% neutral as required.

.7 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered sections on left and even on right, with each section identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.

.8 Provide bolt-on type circuit breakers and/or disconnect switch units.

.9 Means of locking off to meet the Department of Labour requirements for elevator panelboards.

.10 Minimum circuits shall be 42, unless otherwise noted.

.11 Trims and doors shall be painted ANSI 61 grey. Factory applied paint finish on all exterior surfaces.

.12 All required lugs.

.13 Connectors for future breakers and switches. Drill and tap bus work.



2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS .1 Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic

operation, with over centre toggle handle. The handle shall reside in a position between “ON” and “OFF”.

.2 Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip mechanism, to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping, trip-free and trip indicating. Circuit breakers rated at 125A and larger shall have thermal and adjustable magnetic trip mechanism.

.3 Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip type and have a common handle. Tie handles are not acceptable.

.4 Clearly marked with their rated ampacity and respective trip rating and visible without removing bolted covers.

.5 Provide handle locking devices on all branch circuit breakers controlling communication equipment, lighting control, exit signs, emergency lighting, fire alarm system and other life safety equipment.

.6 Circuit breakers feeding unswitched lighting circuits shall be “switching duty” type.

.7 Provide class ‘A’ ground fault protection with the circuit breaker, where required by Electrical Safety Code.

2.4 FUSIBLE SWITCH UNITS .1 Refer to Section of Disconnect Switches.

.2 Fusible pull-outs or door-operated type switches not acceptable.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16050.

.2 Identify circuits controlled by each breaker on directory cards provided with panels. Directories shall be typed and mounted in metal frame with clear plastic cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install panelboards securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surface.

.2 Provide three (2) empty 35 mm (1 ¼”) conduits from all recessed lighting and receptacle panelboards, terminated in ceiling space above.

.3 Provide three (3) empty 53 mm (2”) conduits from all recessed distribution panelboards, terminated in ceiling space above.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16470 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 3 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Disconnect Switches


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide all disconnect switches, whether an integral part of equipment or separately mounted. Refer to Electrical Drawings for switches’ voltage, ampacity and number of poles.

1.2 REFERENCE .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following:

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 4, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 39, Fuseholder Assemblies.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 248 (Part 1 to Part 16), Low Voltage Fuses.



.2 Product data: switches’ ratings and enclosure dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES .1 Enclosures:

.1 Indoor dry locations: CSA Type 1.

.2 Indoor sprinkler locations: CSA Type 2.

.3 Outdoor locations: CSA Type 3R.

.2 Provision for padlocking in off switch position by locks.

.3 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.

.4 Fuses: size as indicated.

.5 Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated.

.6 Heavy-duty horsepower rated, quick-make, quick-break action, front operation, with integral handle mechanism and visible contacts in “OFF” position.

.7 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.



.8 Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labelled for this application.

.9 Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.

.10 Lugs suitable for copper and/or aluminum conductors.

2.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section of 16050.

.2 Indicate name of load controlled.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS .1 Product of one manufacturer for entire project.

.2 Acceptable manufacturers:

.1 Cutler-Hammer.

.2 Schneider.

.3 Siemens.

2.4 FUSES .1 Fuses up to 600 volts and over 600amps:

.1 Where used in motor, transformer and other circuits with an inrush: Class L time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type A4BT or equal by Bussman.

.2 All remaining fuses: Class L non-time delay. Ferraz Shawmut A4BY or equal by Bussman.

.2 Fuses up to 600 volts and up to and including 600amps:

.1 Where used in motor, transformer and other circuits with an inrush: Class J time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type AJT or equal by Bussman.

.2 All remaining fuses: Class J non-time delay. Ferraz Shawmut type A4J or equal by Bussman.

.3 Fuse storage cabinet: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves, suitable sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers, complete with hinged door.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.

.2 In finished areas, where disconnecting devices are required, provide a circuit breaker in flush mounted enclosure.



.3 Provide three spare fuses of each type and size used above 600 amp and six spare fuses of each type and size used up to and including 600amp.

.4 Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuit.

.5 Ensure correct fuses fit to physically match mounting devices.

.6 Ensure correct fuse fitted to assigned electrical circuit.

.7 Mount the fuse storage cabinets on the wall in electrical rooms. Mount the spare fuses in clip neatly arranged and labeled.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16500 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 6 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Lighting Equipment


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide all lighting fixtures with lamps, ballasts and accessories as specified herein and as shown on the Electrical Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Comply with all requirements of the latest edition of CSA Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Include fixture catalogue data sheets with shop drawings. Arrange the fixture catalogue data sheets and identify in the same sequence as the specified fixture list. Fixture catalogue data sheets shall indicate the following:

.1 Dimensions, weight, material, finish and mounting details.

.2 Performance: Candle power distribution curves in two planes, C.V. chart of indoor fixtures and lumen output chart of outdoor fixtures and flood lights.

.3 Pole wind loading, weight, dimension, anchoring details and finish.

.4 Lamps: type and base, burning hours, CRI, CCT and lumens.

.5 Ballasts: type, wiring diagram, watts, voltage, P.F., sound rating, starting temperature, efficiency and other required characteristics.

.3 Submit photometric IES file for all substituted fixtures. Where requested, submit electronic lighting level calculation analysis for the area with substituted fixtures.

.4 Where requested, submit fixture samples of each substituted fixtures.

.5 Where requested, submit colour chips 75 mm x 75 mm in size, or colour chart, illustrating all fixtures finish for review.

.6 Where requested, submit certified heat-run test data for each type of ballast mounting.

.7 Within four (4) weeks of Contract award, provide information on electronic ballast operating frequency for Owner’s co-ordination with Owner supplied equipment operating at high frequencies.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAMPS

.1 High Pressure Sodium Lamps shall be coated type with 2100°K CCT, minimum lamp life of 24,000 burning hours.

.2 Metal Halide lamps shall be warm deluxe white ‘styletone”, coated type with 3500°K CCT, minimum lamp life of 18,000 burning hours, minimum CRI of 80. Pulse start type. Provide double envelope lamps suitable for open fixtures.

.3 Fluorescent Lamps shall be 4100°K CCT, minimum CRI of 85, minimum lamp life of 20,000 burning hours. T8 lamp shall be energy advantage type with minimum 95 lumens/w.

.4 Compact Fluorescent Lamps shall be 4100°K CCT, minimum lamp life of 12,000 burning hours. Minimum CRI of 82, provide four (4) pin lamps for fixtures on dimming circuits.

.5 LED Lamps

.1 Minimum lamp life of 50,000 burning hours.

.2 3000°K CCT for indoor application. 4000°K CCT for outdoor application.

.6 Lamps for all interior and exterior lighting shall have a mercury content of less than 70 picograms per lumen-hour.


.1 Philips

.2 Osram-Sylvania

.3 G.E.

2.2 BALLASTS .1 Fluorescent

.1 Rapid start high efficiency electronic fluorescent ballast, unless otherwise noted.

.2 CSA and UL listed, Class P and type 1 outdoor, integrated electronic circuitry, less than 10% of voltage and frequency sustained variations with no damage to ballast. Less than 15% THD. Ballasts shall have an average lamp crest factor of less than 1.7. Ballast shall have frequency of operation in range 20-30 kHz or greater than 42KHz and operate without visible flicker. Power factor shall exceed 95%. No polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) will be permitted. Comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for transient protection. Class A sound rating, -18°C (0°F) starting temperature, minimum 0.85 ballast factor. Meet FCC Standard for EMI/RFI.



.2 Where dimming ballasts are specified, the electronic dimming ballast shall have the following additional features:

.1 Ballast shall dim continuously between 100% and 20% light output as a minimum.

.2 Ballast shall maintain full filament heat throughout the dimming range.

.3 Ballast dimming circuitry shall be UL Class 2 and fully isolated from ballast input power.

.4 Ballast shall require no intermediate trimming controls between ballast and controlling device

.5 Dimming ballasts shall be compatable with the dimming system supplied.

.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts

.1 Unless noted otherwise, all high pressure sodium, and metal halide ballasts for operation on single phase, 60 cycle power supply 347V or 120 volt as noted. All ballasts to be constant wattage high power factor 0.9 or better. The wave form of the ballast output to provide the full rated lamp output without adversely affecting lamp life.

.2 Meet all applicable ANSI specifications.

.3 Constant wattage, isolated secondary.

.4 Ballasts mounted integral with lighting fixtures to be sealed, potted quiet type and be mounted with an approved vibration assembly and any required accessories to minimize noise transmission.

.5 Ensure trouble-free operation free of overheating for all proposed methods of ballast installation. Supply certified heat-run test data with each type of ballast mounting.

.6 Provide weatherproof ballasts with -30°C starting temperature for outdoor locations and indoor unheated locations.

.7 Provide F-can or potted core & coil type for indoor locations.

.8 Provide pulse start ballast where applicable.


.1 Advance

.2 EBT

.3 Magnetek

.4 Osram – Sylvania

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES .1 Fixtures shall have CSA labels and shall be complete with lamps, ballasts and

necessary accessories for installation.

.2 Unless otherwise indicated, fluorescent lighting fixture bodies to be minimum 20 gauge, cold rolled prime steel of rigid construction with knockout as required. Fixture rigidity to permit any suspension method without sag. Fluorescent fixtures to be suitable for either individual or continuous mounting. Fixture sockets to apply continuous holding pressure on lamps.



.3 Fluorescent fixtures to be finished in baked white enamel (or other colour if specified) which shall resist chipping, corrosion and discolouration. Before finishing all metal to be chemically degreased and neutralized. Finish shall be not less than two coats of enamel, sprayed on and baked. Reflecting surfaces to be white with an average reflectance of not less than 85%.

.4 All fixture types designed with adequate heat sinks to dissipate the generated heat in order to prevent ballast and lamps from overheating with the resulting decrease in their rated life expectancy and/or light output. Fixtures to be wired with type GTF fixture wire.

.5 All fixtures shall be complete with required safety disconnect means.

.6 Fixtures to be designed so that minimum time is required for lamp or ballast replacement.

.7 Plastic lenses to be 100% virgin acrylic not less than 3 mm thick.

.8 All metal halide fixtures shall be equipped with protective lenses.

.9 Include all necessary accessories in tender price for a complete installation. No extra will be allowed for the supplier or contractor failing to provide such accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install all fixtures in the standard manner for the type of fixture and in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions. Support all fixtures from structural members except that fixtures installed in suspended ceilings may be supported by the ceiling where the ceiling supports are reinforced to carry the weight of the fixtures. Co-ordinate with Division 9 and submit written confirmation to the requirements of the Inspection Authority.

.2 In non-accessible ceilings wire with not less than 1220 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above finished ceiling within reach of the fixture openings.

.3 In accessible ceilings wire with 1830 mm AC90 or RW90 wire in flexible conduit to adjacent outlet boxes.

.4 Where fixtures are not installed in approved ceiling system, provide steel fixture studs, brackets and hangers. Where fixtures are hung on chain hangers, provide chain of closed link type capable of supporting ten times the fixture weight. Use U-bolts for chain ends; S-hooks are not acceptable.

.5 Provide suitable trim for all fixtures installed in drywall ceiling or within lay in or snap in tiles.

.6 Provide I.C. frame/enclosure for all fixtures installed in insulated ceiling. Confirm the insulated ceiling areas with Architect. Provide fire rated boxes for all recessed fixture in fire rated ceiling area.



.7 Provide plaster frames for all fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings. Have plaster frames installed under Division #9 and ensure that they are located correctly. Pay for all work associated with this work.

.8 Protect fixtures from dirt and damage during construction and clean when the installation is completed. Replace fixtures showing marks or scratches due to handling or tool marks.

.9 Align fixtures shown in continuous rows or broken lines so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines and misplaced fixtures will not be accepted.

.10 Where luminaries are surface mounted on inverted T-bar ceilings, they shall be supported directly from the building structure. Where this is not possible due to presence of mechanical ducts or other obstruction, supply and install galvanized steel channel, Unistrut or equal, above the ceiling, securely attached to the structure and not from the suspension system for the ceiling, and fasten the luminaires to the channel with clamping nut, bolt, flat washers and lock washer to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Provide bolts at least every 1.2m length of fixture (i.e., 3 bolts for 2.4m fixture).

.11 Fixtures are shown on the electrical drawings in approximate locations only. Install fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, details and/or field instructions issued by the Consultant.

.12 Install lighting fixtures in service areas, underground parking areas, unfinished areas, mechanical and electrical rooms after the mechanical and electrical equipment is in place. Locate fixtures on site to clear all obstructions to the approval of the Consultant. Provide auxiliary steel members for hanging fixtures below ducts and other equipment. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF. Where ceiling height is more than 3 metres, suspend ceiling surface mounted fixtures at 3 metres AFF.

.13 Provide all mounting hardware for all fixtures.

.14 Check the latest ceiling finishes in all areas where recessed fixtures are specified to ensure that fixtures are purchased with suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Replace fixtures which are sent to the site with wrong ceiling trim or flanges with fixtures having the correct trims, flanges, etc. as required without additional cost.

.15 Provide safety chains for all HID fixtures with integral ballasts. Attach chain to fixture and building structure. Safety chain to be designed and secured so as to sustain the sudden weight of the fixture.

.16 In stairs, provide fixture on every main and half landing level. Co-ordinate with Architectural drawings for number of landings.

.17 Fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the reflected ceiling layouts with due consideration for mechanical diffusers, bulkheads, sprinkler heads, and other obstructions. Check Mechanical and Architectural drawings before roughing-in to avoid any possible conflict.



.18 Fixtures connected to ground fault interruptor circuits shall have separate neutrals (common neutrals for 2 or 3 circuits are not acceptable).

.19 Exterior wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be mounted on recessed boxes except where fixtures with integral outlet boxes are specified in which case the recessed outlet box is not required. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored to the wall.

.20 Unless otherwise indicated supply and install concrete bases for lighting standards. Concrete bases shall be trowel finished with all exposed corners bevelled at 45 degrees. Junction boxes shall be carefully set and anchored to ensure flush fit of junction box cover. Concrete bases shall be constructed of 20 Mpa concrete air entrained and steel reinforced as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16530 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 4 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Emergency Lighting System


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Provide emergency lighting system including exit signs, remote heads, and battery units, as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and as otherwise required.

1.2 REFERENCE .1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following:

.1 CSA-C22.2 No. 9, General Requirements for Luminaires.

.2 CSA-C22.2 No. 141, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.

.3 CSA-C22.2 C860, Performance of Internally Lighting Exit Signs.

.4 CSA-C282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Include fixture catalogue data sheets with shop drawings indicating dimensions, components, electrical characteristics and performance data for each fixture and device. Arrange the fixture catalogue data sheets and identify in the same sequence as the specified fixture list.

.3 Submit test report and verifications following the completion of testing.

1.4 WARRANTY .1 For complete system, provide a 2-year no-charge, unconditional guarantee, and 5-

year pro-rate charge guarantee on workmanship and parts.

.2 For batteries, on the second 5-year, provide a pro-rate charge guarantee on workmanship and parts.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Acceptable manufacturers: Emergi-Lite, Beghelli, Lumacell



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXIT SIGNS .1 Edgelit; Lumacell LER23 Series or equivalent

.2 Lamps: Less than 2W, LED.

.3 Inputs:

.1 DC: 24V

.2 AC: Universal: 120V/347V.

.4 Directional arrows: universal type for field adjustment.

.5 Mounting: universal for field selection.

.6 Provide white metal wire guard as indicated on drawings.

2.2 STANDARD REMOTE HEADS .1 Single or double cast aluminum head(s), complete with mounting plates, 300 degree

horizontal and 80 degree vertical minimum adjustment.

.2 Lamps: MR16 Narrow beam, 20W or as shown.

.3 Input: 24VDC

.4 Mounting: ceiling or wall as shown.

.5 Finish: white painted.

.6 Provide white metal wire guard as indicated on drawings.

2.3 BATTERY UNIT .1 Supply voltage: as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

.2 Output voltage: 24V DC.

.3 Operating time: 1/2 hour minimum.

.4 Battery: sealed, maintenance free, long-time lead with rated life of ten (10) years.

.5 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01V for plus or minus 10% input variations capable of restoring a discharged battery to the fully-charged state within twenty-four (24) hours, and switched to a float charge when not in full charge mode.

.6 Solid state transfer circuit.

.7 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.

.8 Signal lights: solid state, for “AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’.



.9 Lamp heads: integral on unit and remote, 345° horizontal and 180° vertical adjustment, white painted cast aluminum head. Lamp type: wide beam flat MR16, 2-20W, unless noted otherwise.

.10 Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts for conduits. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.

.11 Finish: standard factory finish.

.12 Auxiliary equipment:

.1 Advanced diagnostic printed circuit board with auto self test and time delay.

.2 Test switch and LED trouble indicator.

.3 Battery disconnect device.

.4 AC input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet.

.5 Mounting shelf.

.6 Transient voltage surge suppressor on the supply side of power to the unit.

2.4 WIRING .1 Refer to basic materials and methods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Pendant mount exit sign in service rooms and other areas where necessary to clear

obstructions. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.

.2 Install all unit equipment, remote heads, exit signs, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.

.3 Direct heads for illumination to meet OBC requirements.

3.2 TESTING AND VERIFICATION .1 Arrange with the manufacturer to conduct a complete inspection and test of all

installed emergency lighting system.

.2 Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for properly aiming remote heads, recording the light level readings, recording battery full load operation time, issuing a verification indicating that lighting levels meet OBC requirements, and the system has been installed properly.

.3 Submit report and verification to Consultant.

.4 Correct all deficiencies.



.5 Witnessed by Authority having Jurisdiction and Consultant.

.6 All cost involved in testing, verification, and corrections shall be included in the Tender Price.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16730 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 2 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Telecommunication Raceway System


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 This Section of the Specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and


.2 Comply with general condition, Supplementary conditions of the contract, section 16010 – Electrical General Requirements

.3 Comply with section 16050 – Basic Materials & Method.

.4 Comply with EIA/TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

.5 Comply with J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

1.2 SCOPE .1 Provide empty raceway systems including conduits, cable trays, terminal cabinets,

plywood backboards, pull boxes, outlets and cover plates for enclosure of wiring.

.2 Telecommunication systems include, but not limited to, telephone, data cabling, cable TV, P.A., security and access control, emergency alarm, etc.

.3 Co-ordinate with system contractors for all the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Wall outlets shall be 115 mm square boxes with plaster rings to suit single gang

devices unless otherwise noted. Provide stainless steel cover plates for the outlet boxes for future use.

.2 Conduit size shall be in accordance with systems contractor’s requirements and recommended standards.

Guelph Transit Station Section 16730 Jain & Associates Limited Page 2 of 2 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Telecommunication Raceway System


.3 Minimum pull box size shall be as follows:

Maximum conduit size

Size of pull boxes in millimetres For each additional conduit size increase width by:-

Width Length Depth 27mm 102mm 406mm 76mm 51mm 35mm 152mm 508mm 76mm 76mm 53mm 203mm 914mm 102mm 127mm 78mm 305mm 1219mm 127mm 152mm 103mm 381mm 1524mm 203mm 203mm

.4 Plywood backboards shall be minimum 1200 x 2400 mm, 19 mm thick, painted with 2 coats of fire retardant light grey enamel.

.5 Provide a minimum of 2 duplex receptacles on separate circuits at each backboard.

.6 Provide grounding at each backboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Vertically mount outlet boxes, unless noted otherwise, 300 mm to centre above floor,

or 150 mm above counter top where shown at counters or benches.

.2 Fish conduit, clear blockages and outlet and clean out pull boxes at completion of installation. Leave conduit free of water or excess moisture. Install No. 12 gauge galvanized soft iron pull wire, or 1/8" nylon pull cord (minimum 400LB) continuously from outlet to outlet, through conduit and fasten at each box.

.3 Conduit bonds shall have a bending radius of not less than nine times conduit diameter. Ream out conduit and identify ends with green paint.

.4 Install additional steel pull boxes in such a manner that, throughout entire system, there shall be not more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends or more than 30,000 mm in each run, so that wire or cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease.

.5 Show as-installed conduit routing and location of all pull boxes on the record drawings, prior to project completion, for use by systems contractors to facilitate wiring and equipment installation. Include above noted information on final record drawings at project completion.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16760 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 4 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 CCTV System (Cash Allowance)


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 The City of Guelph is extending its corporate access control / CCTV system to the Guelph Transit VIA building. The following document contains the project requirements and the scope of work.

The cost of this work is included under Cash allowances. Refer to Section Cash Allowances.

.2 City of Guelph Access control / CCTV system The City of Guelph is using the Lenel OnGuard system as our corporate access

control/CCTV system. Lenel OnGuard The City of Guelph is utilizing Lenel Onguard 2010 version 6.4.500 TU 1.1

1.2 NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE

.1 The City of Guelph will be providing a dedicated security network at the VIA building that will be utilized for the access control / CCTV system.

1.3 ACCESS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .1 General

The City of Guelph requires that access control be provided and installed for 11 interior and exterior doors on the VIA building. Vendors must supply and install equipment listed below for all doors. Included in the price must be all equipment listed below, cabling, patch cables and any other misc equipment required to complete the installation. All cabling must be installed within conduit when it leaves the security cabinets, there must be no exposed cabling. Vendors must also include in their price Lenel licensing for the listed equipment and Lenel system programming required to configure the access controllers on the City of Guelph’s Lenel system.

.2 IT Room Vendor must supply and install

- 1 x Lenel 2220 - 6 x Lenel 1320 - 1 x Lenel Cabinet - LNL-CTX-6 (24” x 18” x4.5”) - 1 x Power Supply - Misc Cabling and Conduit



.3 Access Control Doors type 1 - Requirements Vendors must supply and install the following equipment for the listed doors

- iClass R10 readers - Request to exit motion detectors - Electronic Strikes - Misc Door Hardware - Power and communication cabling required to connect the reader to

access control panel in IT room

Access Control Doors type 1 – Door Listing 01 (Waiting Rm 100 -front) 02 (Waiting Rm 100 - SW) 03 (Waiting Rm 100 – SE) 04 (Future Vendor Sales 106) 05 (Transit Office 104) 15 (IT-electrical Rm 111) 16 (Basement 001) 17 (East Vestibule 112) 13 (Janitor 114) .4 Access Control Doors type 2 - Requirements Vendors must supply and install for the listed doors

- Electronic Strikes - Misc Door Hardware - Power and data Cabling required to connect the reader to access control

panel in IT room -

Access Control Doors type 2 – Door Listing 10 (Pub Washrm 108) 11 (Pub Washrm 109) 12 (Pub Washrm 110) .5 Access Control Doors type 3 - Requirements Vendors must supply and install for the listed doors

- iClass RPK40 readers / keypad - Request to exit motion detectors - Electronic Strikes - Misc Door Hardware - Power and data Cabling required to connect the reader to access control

panel in IT room



Access Control Doors type 3 – Door Listing 06 (Drivers Lounge 101) 1.4 CCTV SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .1 Camera Type

The City of Guelph requires that bidders MUST provide pricing for the listed camera option. The bidder may provide another camera model that is of equal quality to the listed Camera option and is compatible with Lenel Onguard 2010. The City of Guelph reserves the right to choose the camera model that will be installed. Interior Camera Type: Axis P3346-V Exterior Axis P3346-VE Accessories Vendor must provide Axis Mounting brackets and Pendant Kit where applicable

.2 Camera Requirements

The City of Guelph requires that CCTV cameras are installed at the locations specified on the electrical drawings. The cost of each camera must include Camera, Lenel camera licensing, Lenel system programming, manufacturer’s mounting hardware, labour, misc conduit, patch cables and any other miscellaneous material required to perform the installation.

Camera Number Camera Model Location 19 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 20 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 21 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 22 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 23 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 24 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 25 - A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 26 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 27 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 28 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 29 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 30 – A Axis 3346-VE Exterior 31 – A Axis 3346-V Interior 32 - A Axis 3346-V Interior



33 – A Axis 3346-V Interior 34 – A Axis 3346-V Interior 35 – A Axis 3346-V Interior 36 – A Axis 3346-V Interior 37 - A Axis 3346-V Interior

IP Cameras - Data Cabling All data cabling for IP cameras will be installed prior to camera installation and will not be the responsibility of the selected vendor. IP Cameras - Interior Installation Interior cameras must be mounted to the wall at a height of 2500mm. Installation must hide all holes and cables. IP Cameras - Exterior Installation Exterior cameras must be mounted to the soffit. Installation must hide all holes and cables.

END OF SECTION

Guelph Transit Station Section 16780 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 18 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Communications Cabling (Cash Allowance)


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 The Generic tender gives information to assist in producing an invitation to tender document. It contains information for a full cabling network including horizontal, backbone and campus cabling. The following areas need to be added/deleted as appropriate by the issuer of the document.

.2 The Scope of Work detailing the building's requirements, including number of

outlets, building design etc., needs to be added. .3 The Optional requirements need to be added. This includes stating which of the

system design requirements in this document are optional and also any extra requirements such as active hardware.

.4 This document includes GigaSPEED X10D copper cabling, components and

LazrSPEED fiber. The GigaSPEED X10D copper cabling meets or exceeds the requirements of the Augmented Category 6 (Category 6a / ISO Class EA) specification, and the LazrSPEED performs beyond the OM3 fiber requirements.

.5 This document includes Category 3 copper cabling and components for the

backbone sub-systems. The category 3 cable meets all the requirements for normal voice applications.

.6 The main contractual requirements and details of the tendering process need to

be added at the beginning of the document. This document only covers the system requirements and its installation.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Installation

.1 Supply, deliver, install, test and commission a registered SYSTIMAX Solution for the City of Guelph

.2 Supply and install all associated equipment specified or required for the successful completion of the above.

1.3 GENERAL

.1 All work shall be done in a thorough and conscientious manner according to SYSTIMAX guidelines and industry standards, and shall be subject to inspection and acceptance.



.2 Local regulations or codes shall be followed at all times. .3 The contractor shall be certain that all installation work areas are secure and

made safe in accordance with Health and Safety regulations. .4 An appropriate construction schedule shall be developed by the contractor and

will be subject to approval by the City of Guelph. .5 Prior to starting the installation, the assigned installation supervisor, or lead

technician, shall participate in a walk through of the project location with the City of Guelph personnel and Commscope engineers to review the engineering/installation documentation, verify that all construction necessary for the installation has been completed, and verify all installation methods and cable routes.

.6 The contractor shall be responsible for completing a standardized report form

addressing the weekly progress of the installation schedule. .7 The contractor shall maintain a work area free of debris, rubbish, empty cable

reels, scrap wire, etc., and dispose of such items on a daily basis. .8 The contractor shall take precautions to avoid damage to the City of Guelph

premises and property, and will perform restoration if damage should occur. .9 The contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring) identification at the

main equipment room, splice enclosures encapsulations, service entrances, risers and station connecting blocks in accordance with industry practices.

.10 The contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps,

distribution rings, miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation of the distribution system.

.11 The contractor shall be responsible for labeling all cables and cords, distribution

frames and outlet locations, according to SYSTIMAX SCS or industry standards. Labels must be computer generated using an thermal transfer label maker and good quality label material. (TIA specs for each type of cable/fibre.)

.12 All cable plant installed by the contractor shall be fully tested for continuity,

polarity reversals, wire transpositions, AC and DC voltages, opens and shorts prior to acceptance. Please note that cable pair faults (other than factory) shall be cleared by the installation contractor.



.13 It shall be the responsibility of the installation contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or tools necessary to properly complete the installation. This may include tools for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for copper/fiber cables, communication devices, jack stands for cable reels, or cable winches.

.14 The installation contractor must have prepayment approval for all additional work

not included in the attached 'Scope of Work'. The installation contractor is to submit a written listing of all additional work to be performed, with all incurred costs, prior to the commencement of the work. Payment for additional work shall not be made if this procedure is not followed.

.15 The contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay. .16 The contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or

share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus. All routing of distribution cabling must adhere to SYSTIMAX best practices.

.17 The contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified

distribution cables are not exceeded at any time during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines may require the contractor to provide the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the installation contractor during the implementation.

.18 The installation contractor shall mount any equipment or electronics as close to

the wiring wall fields (if appropriate) as possible, taking into consideration future growth, to facilitate administration and service.

.19 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to inventory all materials upon their

arrival at the City of Guelph location and notify the City of Guelph representative of any missing components.

.20 The contractor shall be responsible for testing all cable prior to the installation of

the cable. If the installation contractor fails to perform this testing operation, the installation contractor shall accept the cable as good and assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective at a later date.

.21 The contractor shall plug conduits and entrance holes where the cabling has

been installed by the installation contractor in the main equipment room, manholes, riser and other cable entrance locations with re-unutterable duct seal or flame retardant putty.

.22 In some City of Guelph sites it may be necessary for the contractor to remove or

float the existing facilities in order to install the new distribution system.



.23 The contractor shall be responsible for providing an approved ground at all newly

installed distribution frames and protector locations insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes and framework. All grounds shall consist of appropriate gauge copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and bonded to the main electrical ground. All grounding must adhere to specification TIA-607.

.24 If the cross connect hardware is wall mounted, it shall be the responsibility of the

installation contractor to equip the entire wall surfaces with fire retardant plywood sheets. The plywood sheets shall be 8 feet x 4 feet x ¾ inches and shall be mounted vertically several inches above the floor level. The plywood sheets shall also be painted to the City of Guelph specifications.

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .1 The system offered and quoted, shall incorporate all features and facilities listed in this specification, except for the items listed under 'Optional Requirements'. 1.5 SPECIFICATION

.1 The SYSTIMAX Solution shall consist of any or all of the following subsystems:

a) Work location subsystem b) Horizontal subsystem c) Administration subsystem d) Backbone subsystem e) Equipment room subsystem f) Campus subsystem

.2 The system shall: a) Support analogue and digital applications, data, local area networks

(LAN), and video on a common cabling platform.

The systems that shall be supported include, but are not limited to;

Data Processing - IBM (3270 Type A, System 34/36/38 and AS/400), Wang, Unisys, DEC.



Data Communications - EIA-232-D, RS-422, RS-423, Ethernet (10Base-T), Token Ring, Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI), Twisted Pair Physical Media Dependant (TPPMD), Fast Ethernet, 100Base-T, 100VGAnyLAN, ATM at 155Mbps and transmission speeds of 622Mbps, Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gbps Ethernet.

Voice Applications – Analogue and digital voice, basic rate and primary rate ISDN.

Video - Analogue Video, Digital Video, Video Conferencing, RGB Video and 550mhz broadband video.

b) Cover its capacity and functionality with minimum components.

c) Be flexible and capable of including new facilities or technologies as they

become required or available. .3 The system shall specifically support the applications and associated

transmission distances described in the SYSTIMAX 'Structured Cabling System Performance Specification'.

.4 The Contractor will supply a statement of compliance that the system proposed

meets the requirements of the EEC Directives on EMC. This statement should be backed by test documentation showing the compliance of the cabling system under stated test conditions. The recommended test networks are 10GBaseT, 1000BaseT, 100BaseT, and 10BaseT. EMC compliance should be provided as part of a 20 Year Extended Product and Applications Assurance Warranty. All test and certification results must be made available to the City in electronic format.

.1 The wiring vendor (installer) shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all Category 6A and fiber optic cabling and components meet or exceed specifications (including installation) of TIA/EIA-568-B.1, 568-B.2, 568- B.3 and 569. .5 System Channel Performance

1. SYSTIMAX GigaSPEED X10D Solution focuses on the performance of the channel as a whole, rather than the performance of individual components. This is a more useful parameter for measuring performance as it takes into account the combined components required to move a signal from the closet to the desktop, thus providing a guarantee for the total signal quality.



The Guaranteed Performance Specifications for 4-Connection Channels: Electrical Parameters Guaranteed Channel Margins to Guaranteed Channel Margins

to ISO/IEC 11801 : 2002 Draft ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.1 “Class E” (1 – 250 MHz) “Class EA” (1 – 5001 MHz)

Insertion Loss 5% 2% NEXT 6 dB 1 dB

PSNEXT 7.5 dB 2.5 dB ACR-F 6 dB 4 dB

PSACR-F 8 dB 6 dB Return Loss 3 dB 0 dB PSANEXT N/A 0 dB PSAACR-F N/A 0 dB

Guaranteed Channel Performance Specifications for 4-Connection GigaSPEED X10D Solution2

Insertion PS Pr-pr PS PS Pr-pr PS Return Delay Freq Loss ANEXT NEXT ACR NEXT ACR ACR-F ACR-F Loss Delay Skew (MHz) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (ns) (ns) 1.0 2.1 75.0 71.0 68.9 69.5 67.4 69.3 68.3 22.0 580 40 4.0 4.0 74.0 69.0 65.0 68.0 64.0 57.2 56.2 22.0 562 40 8.0 5.6 71.0 64.2 58.5 63.1 57.5 51.2 50.2 22.0 557 40 10.0 6.3 70.0 62.6 56.3 61.5 55.2 49.3 48.3 22.0 555 40 16.0 7.9 68.0 59.2 51.3 58.1 50.2 45.2 44.2 21.0 553 40 20.0 8.9 67.0 57.6 48.7 56.5 47.6 43.2 42.2 20.5 552 40 25.0 10.0 66.0 56.0 46.1 54.8 44.9 41.3 40.3 20.0 551 40 31.3 11.2 65.1 54.4 43.3 53.2 42.1 39.4 38.4 19.5 550 40 62.5 15.9 62.0 49.4 33.4 48.1 32.2 33.3 32.3 17.0 549 40 100.0 20.4 60.0 45.9 25.6 44.6 24.2 29.3 28.3 15.0 548 40 200.0 29.4 55.5 40.8 11.4 39.4 10.0 23.2 22.2 12.0 547 40 250.0 33.1 54.0 39.1 6.0 37.7 4.5 21.3 20.3 11.0 546 40 300.0 36.5 52.8 32.7 -3.8 31.3 -5.3 19.7 18.7 8.0 546 40 400.0 42.7 51.0 30.6 -

12.2 29.1 -13.7 17.2 16.2 8.0 546 40

500.0 48.3 49.5 28.9 -19.4

27.3 -21.0 15.3 14.3 8.0 546 40



Note: The table provides reference values only. All parameters comply with the governing equations over the entire frequency range. All values and equations apply to worst-case channels utilizing four-pair 10G cables with full cross-connects, consolidation points and work area outlets (4 connectors in a channel) for the length up to 100 meters. .6 Fiber Optic Cabling Performance (Multimode)

1. 300 m Laser Optimized 50/125 µm Multimode Guaranteed Channel Performance 1. The 50/125 µm fiber channel shall support single-channel serial

transmission, in both the building riser and campus backbones, to 10 gigabits per second (Gb/s) for a distance of 300 meters with up to 5 LC connections.

2. The 50/125 µm fiber channel shall be backward compatible with legacy applications such as: Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI, Fast Ethernet and ATM for in-building network distances) ensuring a smooth migration path from 10Mb/s to 10 Gb/s using achievable technology.

3. The channel shall support 10 Gb/s short wavelength (850 nm) emerging technology applications using vertical cavity surface emitting lasers (VCSELs)and low bit rate LED applications for legacy systems.

4. The 50 µm fiber shall be optimized to control differential mode delay (DMD) so that “pulse splitting” at 10 Gb/s is eliminated.

5. A single manufacturer shall manufacture the 50 µm fiber cable, 50 µm fiber connectors, 50 µm patch cords and apparatus, which comprise the channel.

6. The 50 µm fiber shall meet or exceed the following standards, as applicable, for OSP or Plenum cables: ICEA S-83-596, ISO/IEC-794, GR-409, TIA/EIA455, TIA/EIA492, TIA/EIA568-B, ANSI-FDDI, IEEE 802, UL 910, OFNP classification as described in the National Electric Code (NEC2), OFN-LS Low Smoke Cables, CSA Certified (OFN FT4/FT6) and approved component industry standards.

7. The manufacturer shall warrant the 10 Gb/s channel’s cable, components, and applications for a period of 20 years.

8. The 20-year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and include all labor to replace any defective components as well as the component replacement.



1.6 SYSTEM DESIGN .1 Work Location Subsystem

.2 The connection between the information outlet and the station equipment in the work area is provided by the work area subsystem. It consists of cords, adapters, and other transmission electronics.

.3 Contractor shall supply the wiring or cords that connect terminal devices to

information outlets. This includes mounting cords and connectors, as well as extension cords needed.

.4 Contractor shall supply the necessary transmission electronics equipment listed

under 'Optional Requirement' in order to complete the system successfully. .5 All modular GS10E work area cordages shall be 10 ft in length and shall

incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides maximum protection from snagging during moves and re-arrangements

.6 All patch cords shall exceed TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC Category 6A/Classs EA

channel specifications. No field termination of RJ-45 cords is allowed. 1.7 HORIZONTAL SUBSYSTEM

.1 The horizontal subsystem provides connections from the cross connect to the information outlets (IOs) in the work areas. It consists of the horizontal transmission media, the associated connecting hardware terminating this media and IOs in the work area. Each floor of a building is served by its own horizontal subsystem.

.2 Horizontal Data Cabling

.1 Contractor shall supply a horizontal cable to connect each information outlet to the backbone subsystem on the same floor.

.2 The type of horizontal cables used shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair

(UTP), Category 6a, 1091 or 2091 GigaSPEED X10D, unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document.

.3 The cable shall be able to support voice and data, to at least 10 Gbps

and shall have electrical performance specified out to 550MHz. .4 The 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP), Category 6a, 1091 or 2091

GigaSPEED X10D cable shall be white in colour unless otherwise specified.



.5 The 4-pair UTP cable shall be run using a star topology format from the

patch panel at the administration subsystem on each floor to every individual information outlet. All cable routes to be approved by the City of Guelph representative prior to installation of the cabling.

.6 The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the

administration subsystem (Telecommunications Closet) on each floor to the information outlet shall not exceed 90 meters. If necessary, additional Telecommunications Closets shall be added to maintain the required distances.

.7 Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength

requirements, given below, of the 4-pair UTP 1091 or 2091 cable during handling and installation:

- Bending radius - 4 times the cable diameter - Maximum pulling tension – 25 lbs (11.34 kg)

.8 Each run of cable between the patch panel and the information outlet

shall be continuous without any joints or splices, except for the optional use of a consolidation point.

.9 In existing structures, the contractor shall place distribution cabling

following the same basic route of the existing wiring, except where conduits are full or the route is not easily accessible. In new structures, the contractor shall place cabling in the existing, or newly installed, distribution media.

.10 In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where cable trays or conduit

are not available, the contractor shall bundle station wiring with velcro cable ties, tied loosely at appropriate distances (approximately 1m). The cable bundling shall be supported via the existing building structure and framework. All old cable should be removed prior to the installation of any new cable.

.11 Pull boxes shall be used for the following purposes:

- Fishing the conduit run - Pulling the cable to the box and then looping the cable to be

pulled into the next length of conduit A pull box shall, therefore, be placed in a conduit run where:

- The length exceeds 30 m



- There are more than two 90° bends - If there is a reverse bend in the run

.12 If the interior of walls is not obstructed, the contractor shall conceal

horizontal distribution wiring internally within the walls. If such obstructions exist, the Contractor shall secure approval by CITY OF GUELPH prior to the use of an alternate method.

.13 The contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing all ceiling

tiles required for the installation of the wiring. Any damage to the ceiling tiles will be made good by the Contractor.

1.8 INFORMATION OUTLET DATA

.1 All Category 6A outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6A/ Class EA transmission requirements when installed in a complete channel, as specified in draft TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Second Edition Amendment 1.

.2 The Category 6A outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45 or a

90 angle in any M-series modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding the need for special faceplates.

.3 The GigaSPEED X10D MGS500 information outlet shall be wired in an EIA/TIA

568A configuration. 1.9 HORIZONTAL VOICE CABLING

.1 Contractor shall supply a horizontal cable to connect each information outlet to the backbone subsystem on the same floor.

.2 The type of horizontal cables used shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP),

Category 6A, GigaSPEED X10D , 1071E or 2071E, unless otherwise noted on the floor plans or within this document.

.3 The cable shall be able to support voice and data, to at least and shall have

electrical performance specified out to 550MHz. .4 The horizontal cables shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair cables and shall be

of solid copper conductors.. .5 The 4-pair UTP cable shall be run using a star topology format from the patch

panel at the administration subsystem on each floor to every individual information outlet. All cable routes to be approved by the City of Guelph representative prior to installation of the cabling.



.6 The length of each individual run of horizontal cable from the administration

subsystem (Telecommunications Closet) on each floor to the information outlet shall not exceed 90 meters. If necessary, additional Telecommunications Closets shall be added to maintain the required distances.

.7 Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements,

given below, of the 4-pair 1071E or 2071E cable - Bending radius - 4 times the cable diameter - Maximum pulling tension – 25 lbs (11.34 kg)

.8 Each run of cable between the patch panel and the information outlet shall be continuous without any joints or splices, except for the optional use of a consolidation point.

.9 In existing structures, the contractor shall place distribution cabling following the

same basic route of the existing wiring, except where conduits are full or the route is not easily accessible. In new structures, the contractor shall place cabling in the existing, or newly installed, distribution media.

.10 In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where cable trays or conduit are not

available, the contractor shall bundle station wiring with velcro cable ties, tied loosely at appropriate distances (approximately 1m). The cable bundling shall be supported via the existing building structure and framework. All old cable should be removed prior to the installation of any new cable.

.11 Pull boxes shall be used for the following purposes:

- Fishing the conduit run - Pulling the cable to the box and then looping the cable to be

pulled into the next length of conduit A pull box shall, therefore, be placed in a conduit run where: - The length exceeds 30 m - There are more than two 90° bends - If there is a reverse bend in the run

.12 If the interior of walls is not obstructed, the contractor shall conceal horizontal distribution wiring internally within the walls. If such obstructions exist, the Contractor shall secure approval by CITY OF GUELPH prior to the use of an alternate method.



.13 The contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing all ceiling tiles required for the installation of the wiring. Any damage to the ceiling tiles will be made good by the Contractor.

1.10 INFORMATION OUTLET VOICE

.1 All information outlets shall be of EN 60603-7 (IEC 603-7) and EN 28877 (ISO 8877) 8-position modular MGS400 connectors and of the insulation displacement type. They shall be capable of receiving of solid and stranded wires.

.2 The information outlet shall be either surface or flush mounted in appropriate

face plates or floor boxes. .3 The MGS400 information outlet shall be multivendor supportive and shall be

wired in an EIA/TIA 568A configuration. .4 The MGS400 information outlet shall meet or exceed the Category 6

requirements of the ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-B, ISO IS 11801 and EN 50173 standards.

1.11 ADMINISTRATION SUBSYSTEM

.1 The administration subsystem links all of the subsystems together. It consists of labeling hardware for providing circuit identification and patch cords or jumper wire used for creating circuit connections at the cross connects.

.2 The administration subsystem shall consist of GigaSPEED X10D 360-1100GS5-

xx patch panels for termination of copper cables, both data and voice, and 600G2 or 1000G2 19” rack mount patch panels for optical fiber cable. All rack or cabinet layouts, including the choice of panel port counts, are to be approved by the City of Guelph prior to installation, and the preferred method should be detailed by the Contractor in the tender response.

.3 RJ45 Patch Panels

.1 The 360-1100GS5-24 or 360-1100GS5-48 patch panel shall be able to

accommodate stranded and solid cable conductors. The panels shall meet or exceed the ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-B, ISO IS 11801 and EN 50173 Category 6a standards. 24 port or 48 port versions shall be selected as a appropriate.

.2 The modular RJ45 patch panels must have patch cord routing

incorporated in the panel. .3 A full complement of GS10E Category 6a patchcords must be provided



. 4 Network Racks and Cable Management

.1 Network rack shall be 19”w x 45U high with 3” deep channel – CommScope RK3-45A

.2 Vertical cable manager shall have cable support fingers spaced at 1U

increments and include dual hinge latching doors which can be opened left or right. Door shall be brushed silver in colour – CommScope VCM-SS-84-6

.3 Horizontal cable managers shall include covers which hinge up or down,

and shall be 2U in height – CommScope HTK-19-SS-2U 1.12 BACKBONE SUBSYSTEM

.1 The contractor shall supply multi-pair Category 3 cables for voice and low speed data applications in the backbone sub-system. The contractor shall supply 4 pair GigaSPEED XL copper cables and/or multi-core fiber optic cables for the high speed data applications in the backbone sub-system. The decision whether to install GigaSPEED XL copper cables or fiber optic should take into account distance and bandwidth requirements. These cables shall be able to support voice, data and building services applications. These cables shall meet or exceed the attenuation and PowerSum NEXT requirements of ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-B, ISO IS 11801 and EN 50173 standards. The contractor shall observe the appropriate bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables during handling and installation.

1.13 FIBRE OPTIC INFRASTRUCTURE .1 Fibre Optic Cable

.1 The optical fiber cable shall consist of LazrSPEED 300 and TeraSPEED Enhanced multimode/singlemode fibers. The fiber cable shall meet the following specifications :

.2 Multimode fiber The multimode shall meet and exceed the OM3 fiber specifications in the

ISO standards. Fiber cable shall be 12-strand indoor distribution cable, 5201 012A ZPAQ

(for plenum rated) or 5200 012A ZRAQ (for riser rated).



Mechanical Performance - Cable minimum bend radius : 20 times cable diameter, during

installation and 10 times cable diameter, after installation - Buffered fiber minimum bend radius : 19 mm - Operating temperature range : 0 to +50 degrees C - Storage temperature range : -40 to +70 degrees C

Optical Specifications - Maximum fiber loss :

- 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm - 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm - Minimum bandwidth : - 1500 MHz-km at 850 nm (OFL)

- 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm (OFL) - 2000MHz.km at 850 nm (DMD) - 500 MHz.km at 1300 nm (DMD)

.2 Fiber Optic Connectors .1 The LC connectors shall meet or exceed the following specifications: - Operating temperature: -40 to +75 degree C - Average loss: 0.3 dB/mated connector or better (0.1 dB for the

LC) - Pre-radiused ceramic tip, product number P1001A-Z-125R .3 Fiber Optic Patch Cords

.1 The fiber patch cordage shall consist of two single, buffered, laser-optimized LazrSPEED 550 multimode fibers. The fiber patch cord shall be terminated with LC connectors on at least one end, with the opposing end’s connector choice to be approved by the City of Guelph (based on equipment requirements)

.2 The multimode fiber patch cords shall meet the following specifications:

- minimum bend radius: 38mm - operating temperature: -20 to +70 degrees C - average loss: 0.3 dB/mated connector - Minimum bandwidth : - 1500 MHz-km at 850 nm (OFL) - 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm (OFL) - 2000MHz.km at 850 nm (DMD) - 500 MHz.km at 1300 nm (DMD) - Approved cord: FPCXLCLC22-RF007



.4 Fiber Optic Patch Panels

1. The fiber patch panels shall be a 19” rack mounted sliding shelf, and 1U in height - 360G2-1I-MOD-SD. The fiber panel shall accept up to four modular fiber cassettes.

2. Modular fiber cassettes shall consist of six duplex LC adapters, 360G2

Cartridge 12-LC-LS-AQ. 3. MODG2-Blank panels shall be installed in any unpopulated slots on fiber

panel. .5 Fiber Optic Conduit

1. Conduit for fibre optic cabling shall be EMT , minimum 2” in diameter. 2. All corner shall be 90 degree sweeps (no LBs). 3. Pull boxes shall be installed every 150 feet or after every 2 – 90 degree

corners which ever comes first. These boxes shall be no less than 12” x 12” x 4” in size. Pull boxes shall not be used as a corner.

4. All ends of the conduit shall be terminated using an end connector complete with nylon bushing.

1.14 OUTLETS DENSITY

.1 The quantity and location of outlets for both IT and building services are shown in the detail drawing plans. However, if the drawing plans are not available, the following general design guidelines should be adopted :-

Number of

IT Outlets Work Area (sq m) Grid system

General Office Area

3 9 3 m grid (?)

Meeting Rooms ? ? 3 m grid (?) 1.15 ENGINEERING

.1 The authorized contractor selected for this GigaSPEED X10D / XL7 / LazrSPEED / TeraSPEED Solution must be a certified Systimax VAR and shall adhere to all SYSTIMAX Solution design, engineering and installation procedures and utilize authorized SYSTIMAX GigaSPEED X10D / XL7 and LazrSPEED/ TeraSPEED components in provisioning the Project.



.2 An initial planning meeting will be held with the successful bidder to clarify all

requirements (systems, services, distribution methods, etc), identify responsibilities, and schedule the events that will transpire during the implementation of the project. Within two (2) weeks of the initial meeting, the contractor shall provide a written report and project schedule to clearly document the events and responsibilities associated with the project.

.3 In order to start the initial engineering phase, the City of Guelph shall provide the

contractor with one (1) clearly readable, up-to-date scale copy of all architectural, electrical and mechanical drawings, two (2)weeks prior to the commencement of any engineering design activities. This will allow for a one (1) week review of the diagrams by the contractor, and allow one (1) week for CITY OF GUELPH to answer any queries pertaining to the contractor's review.

.4 Upon completion of the initial engineering stage, the contractor shall provide two

(2) draft copies of engineering documentation for approval by the City of Guelph. These should be in hardcopy and softcopy CAD format. The City of Guelph will review the engineering documentation within a two (2) week period. If no revisions are required, the documentation shall be formally accepted in writing by the City of Guelph. Any revisions shall be completed by the contractor within a two (2) week time period and resubmitted for review.

.5 The final engineering diagrams and documentation shall include two "D" size

(24" x 36") copies of the items listed below: These should be in hardcopy and softcopy CAD format.

a) Riser Distribution Plan b) Layout of all Distribution Frames c) Cable Tray, Conduit and Raceway Plans d) Campus Distribution Plan (if applicable) e) Equipment Room Plans f) Work Area Floor Plans g) Building Control Plans

.6 In addition to the engineering diagrams, the following items shall be provided by

the contractor:

a) Cable records and Assignments b) Cable Management Software to include computer and printer (Please provide a description of the software and hardware to be

provided.) c) Project Management



1.16 SUPPORT AND EXPERIENCE .1 Technical Support Staff

.1 Contractor shall provide a list of their SYSTIMAX approved technical support staff, together with their working experience.

.2 Contractor shall state if their support staff are trained by the

manufacturer, on-site training or other means. .3 Contractor shall state their nearest branch office in relation to the site

proposed for the installation of a SYSTIMAX SCS. If none, the location of the main office shall be stated.

.4 Contractor shall state their nearest location of their principal's support

center. This center shall have permanently stationed support staff who are capable of providing technical support if required.

1.17 CONTRACTOR RECORD .1 Project References .1 Contractor shall provide a list of no less than five (5) existing

SYSTIMAX structured cabling systems of similar size as references with the submission.

1.18 LETTERS OF COMMENDATION .1 Contractor shall enclose letters of commendation from the City of Guelph, if any. 1.19 HANDOVER AND SITE REGISTRATION .1 Testing .1 Copper Cable Testing

Testing of all copper wiring shall be performed prior to system cutover. 100 percent of the horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and presence of AC voltage. Horizontal wiring pairs shall be tested from the telecommunications outlet to the TC. 100% of the cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the channel specifications of Category 6a. Testing shall be done with a TIA/EIA Level III test set using the approved SYSTIMAX adaptor and settings of the test set manufacturer.



Test shall include length, mutual capacitance, characteristic impedance, attenuation, and near-end crosstalk. Near end crosstalk measurements shall be done at both the information outlet and the cross connect. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to the City of Guelph. Complete, end to end test results must be submitted to the City of Guelph.

.2 Optical Fiber Cable Testing

All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system. There shall be no splices unless clearly defined in this RFP. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1310 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers. Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to the City of Guelph. Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy and softcopy to the point of contact. All fiber cables shall be tested in accordance with the SYSTIMAX fiber testing guidelines dated xxx 2009.

.2 Manufacturer Warranty Contractor shall provide a 20 year SYSTIMAX SCS Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this cabling system. .3 Additional Warranty Contractor shall state any additional Contractor supplied warranty. 1.20 CITY OF GUELPH ACCEPTANCE

.1 At the conclusion of the installation a preliminary walk through with the installation contractor will be performed to check for installation quality, accurate performance of the work, and to verify engineering diagrams. Any modifications to the documentation or the installation that may be required shall be accomplished within a two (2) week period. "City of Guelph Acceptance" shall consist of a final walk through with the installation contractor. The walk through shall be scheduled within three (3) weeks of the completion of the installation in order to turn the project and documentation over to the City of Guelph. Please note that "City of Guelph Acceptance" does not release the installation contractor from repairing any cabling errors or improperly labeled circuits, caused by the installation contractor, that may be discovered at a later date.

END OF SECTION

VIA Station – City of Guelph Specs and Requirements

IT / Electrical Room

Wall Space

A Fire Rated backboard should be installed on the wall to accommodate all wall mounted equipment.

1 – Access Control Cabinet (24” x 18” x 4.5”)

1 – Wall mount Cabinet (Minelec)

Bell Demark

Belden 10A (BIX Mount to accommodate analog bridge to Panduit cabinet)

Floor

1 – Panduit Network Cabinet (Already Installed) (D – 47.2”, H – 83”, W – 28”)

1 – Panduit Split Network Cabinet (D – 47.2”, H – 83”, W – 28”) Part# S752S2C122B

Access / CCTV

Conduit Requirements for Door Access controls

Conduit must be installed from IT room to each door to allow for installation of electrical and communication cabling. Conduit run from feeder to door must be a minimum of 3/4”. Feeder should be sized accordingly.

As stated ¾ all conduit runs to access control doors needs to be min ¾”. All Conduit for IP cameras and data drops which will be using systimax CAT6a cable must be a minimum of 1”, with feeder conduit sized accordingly. (4” feeder conduits preferred)

Refer to Section 16760 CCTV and Access Control.

Structured Cable

Refer to Section 16780 Communications Cabling.

City Drops – All City drops need to be terminated in full sized Panduit cabinet in Room 113

VIA Drops – All VIA drops need to be terminated in top of Panduit split cabinet in Room 113

Greyhound Drops – All Greyhound drops need to be terminated in the bottom of Panduit split cabinet in room 113

Minelec Drops – All Minelec drops need to be terminated in the Minelec Cabinet

a. City Drops

Quantity Location 7 Office 104 (PC/Phone, Printer(2), AVL, extra (3) – 813 mm high 5 Divers Lounge 101 (PC/ Phone, Kronos, Printer(2), Extra (2) on south wall

at Consultant’s direction. 2 Digital Signage Clock Center of Room (100) 6 Waiting Area 100 (Along Walls 2800mm high – Future Use) 1 Data Drop to Minelec Cabinet (Phone system interface to Paging) 2 Wireless Access Points 19 IP Cameras (Security) 1 Grey Hound Ticket Office (116) (Security) 1 Lenel Access Panel IT Room (111) (Security)

b. VIA Drops

Quantity Location 8 VIA Ticket Sales Room (106)

10 locations are shown: 6 at ticket counter, 2 on west wall, 2 outside for kiosks.

2 Digital Signage Clock Center of Room (100) 1 Access Panel IT Room (111) (Security) 1 Interactive kiosk at floor level below clock.

c. Greyhound Drops

Quantity Location 10 Greyhound Ticket Sales (116) 1 Greyhound Office (115) 2 Digital Signage Clock Center of Room (100) 1 Access Panel IT Room (111) (Security)

d. Minelec Drops

Quantity Location 1 Office (104) 1 VIA Ticket Sales (106) 1 Greyhound Ticket Sales (116)

e. 25 Pair from Bell Demarc to City Rack (BIX to PP)

Guelph Transit Station Section 16950 Jain & Associates Limited Page 1 of 5 Project No. 1008 October 11, 2013 Occupancy & Daylighting Sensors


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein.

.2 Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and

drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16. .3 Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other

applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems.

1.2 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION

.1 Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed.

.2 All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all

state and local applicable code requirements. .3 Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility

and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%. .4 Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush

current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

.2 The sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.



.3 Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted.

.2 Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product,

location and orientation of each sensor. This plan shall reviewed by Consultant prior to manufacturing.

.3 Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper

wiring. .4 Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications

indicating compliance to the specification. .5 Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic

ballasts. 1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION .1 It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility to verify all proper adjustments and

train owner's personnel to ensure owner's satisfaction with the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .1 The Watt Stopper .2 Leviton .3 Hubbell



2.2 PRODUCTS .1 All products shall be Watt Stopper product numbers:

1. Wall OS: DW 100 Dual Technology Wall Switch Sensor 2. Ceiling OS: DT 355 Dual Technology Ceiling Sensor 3. DLS: LS 102 Daylighting Controller 4. Power and Slave Packs: BZ 50 (120V) or B 347D P (347V). 5. InteliSwitch: TS-200

.2 Dual Technology sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive

infrared heat changes. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination

between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on.

.3 All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL

lamp systems and rated motor loads. .4 Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set.

No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

.5 All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay

and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering.

.6 In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each

sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

.7 All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to

verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. .8 All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.

2.3 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU

.1 Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Control unit shall provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors.



.2 Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 20A - 120 VAC Ballast 20A - 277 VAC Ballast .3 Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II , 18-24 AWG,

stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable.

.4 Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be

#14 AWG. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

.2 It is the contractors responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the

manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.

.3 Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure

the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.



3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING .1 Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper

installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify:

1. That all occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and

adjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents. 2. The occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within the

manufacturers specifications. 3. The sensors and relay panels interact as a complete and operational

system to meet the design intent. 4. Manufacturer to provide a written statement verifying that the system

meets the above requirements. .2 Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel

in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls.

.3 Manufacturer shall provide system programming including:

1. Wiring documentation. 2. Switch operation. 3. Telephone overrides. 4. Operating schedules.

.4 The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical

engineer with ten working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine-tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors.

END OF SECTION

City of Guelph Train Station Hydronic Heating System Installation

Mechanical and Electrical Specification

Buildings included in this specification Building 1 – City of Guelph Train Station

79 Carden Street, Guelph, ON, N1H 3A4 EEI Project: 1257 September 2013

Prepared for:

Prepared by:

Cambridge, Ontario 519-624-9965 www.ee-solutions.com

THOMAS BROWN ARCHITECTS www.tbrownarch.ca

Efficiency Engineering Inc. Sep-13 Preliminary Page 2 of 51

Table of Contents 13280 – Hazardous Materials .......................................................................................................... 3 15010 - Mechanical General Requirements .................................................................................... 4 15047 – Identification ....................................................................................................................... 9 15059 – Cleaning and Protection ................................................................................................... 11 15080 – Cutting and Patching ........................................................................................................ 12 15081 – Thermal Insulation for Piping ........................................................................................... 13 15094 – Hangers and Supports ..................................................................................................... 15 15101 – Installation of Pipework .................................................................................................... 18 15131 – Pumps - Hydronic Systems .............................................................................................. 23 15179 – Pipe System Filters .......................................................................................................... 25 15181 – Hydronic Specialties ........................................................................................................ 26 15188 – HVAC Water Treatment Systems .................................................................................... 28 15190 – Natural Gas Piping ........................................................................................................... 31 15510 – Hot Water Boilers ............................................................................................................. 34 15551 – Breeching, Flues, and Chimney Liners ............................................................................ 39 15762 – Finned Tube Radiation Heaters ....................................................................................... 41 15765 – Unit Heaters ..................................................................................................................... 43 15916 – Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC ........................................................... 45 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC ..................................................................... 47 16010 – Electrical General Requirements ..................................................................................... 49 Appendix A – Design Drawings ..................................................................................................... 51

Efficiency Engineering Inc Sep-13 Section 13280 Page 3 of 51

13280 – Hazardous Materials

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES .1 Definitions:

.1 Dangerous Goods: product, substance, or organism specifically listed or meets hazard criteria established in Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations.

.2 Hazardous Material: product, substance, or organism used for its original purpose; and is either dangerous goods or material that will cause adverse impact to environment or adversely affect health of persons, animals, or plant life when released into the environment.

.3 Hazardous Waste: hazardous material no longer used for its original purpose and that is intended for recycling, treatment or disposal.

.2 Reference Standards: .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act,1999 (CEPA 1999)

.1 Export and Import of Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Recyclable Material Regulations (SOR/2005-149).

.2 Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDG Act), (c. 34). .2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (T-19.01-SOR/2001-286).

.3 Designated Substances: asbestos in construction projects and in building and repair operations. .1 Ontario Regulation (O. Reg) 278-05.

.4 Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.5 National Research Council Canada Institute for Research in Construction (NRC-IRC) .1 National Fire Code of Canada.

1.2 ASBESTOS .1 This Contract includes the removal of ACM pipe and mechanical services insulation from specific

locations that affect the Work. .2 Despite the removal in affected locations there will be ACM that remains within the location of the

Work so the Contractor must take care when working in and around these areas so as to avoid disturbing.

2.0 PRODUCTS .1 Section not used.

3.0 EXECUTION .1 Section not used.

End of 13280

Efficiency Engineering Inc. Sep-13 Section 15010 Page 4 of 51

15010 - Mechanical General Requirements

1.0 GENERAL .1 Refer and conform to all Sections of Division '0' and Division '1' as if they were included herein. .2 This Section covers items common to all Sections of Division 15.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .1 The Mechanical Contractor, hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor" shall furnish all labour, material,

tools, equipment, supervision and other services as may be required to execute the work described in the Specification and on the accompanying drawings.

.2 Review "Bid Submission Package" for separate prices and cash allowances.

.3 Base Bid with the specified equipment is required. Unless clearly indicated elsewhere in this specification, alternates will not be accepted without prior written approval from the Engineer.

1.3 SITE EXAMINATION .1 Before submitting tenders, carefully examine the Mechanical Drawings and all Specifications having a

bearing on the work, visit the site of the existing building and thoroughly ascertain that the work can be carried out satisfactorily without any changes to the Drawings or Specifications in the existing structure. No extras will be allowed for anything which would have been revealed in the course of such an examination.

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS .1 The installation shall comply with the latest editions and all amendments of the following codes and

standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur, the higher standards will apply: .1 Ontario Building Code .2 Ontario Fire Code .3 CAN/CSA-B214 Installation Code for Hydronic Heating Systems .4 CAN/CSA-B52 Mechanical Refrigeration Code .5 CAN/CSA-B149.2 Propane Storage and Handling Code .6 CAN/CSA-B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code .7 Canadian Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Code .8 N.F.P.A. Standards .9 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers Standards .10 Ontario Gas Utilization Code. .11 Local Codes, Standards and Bylaws .12 Ontario Ministry of Environment .13 Technical Standards and Safety Authority (TSSA)

1.5 REGULATIONS, PERMITS, FEES, CONNECTION CHARGES AND CERTIFICATES .1 All materials and workmanship shall meet all Provincial Building, Municipal, N.F.P.A., and Fire

Marshall Regulations, Codes and Bylaws in force in the area of the project. .2 All equipment shall be CSA approved. .3 Each Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and pay for all fees and connection charges for all

services provided by this division. .4 Any changes required by authorized inspectors shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

1.6 GUARANTEE .1 Provide a written guarantee to cover all materials and installation of the complete mechanical systems.

This guarantee shall extend for a period of one year from the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

.2 Specific guarantee of manufacturers whose warranty normally extends over longer or shorter periods than one year, shall in no way limit the guarantee of the mechanical work.

.3 Any defects occurring within the guarantee period shall be repaired/replaced at no cost to the Owner.

.4 Where permanent equipment is used to provide temporary services, the warranty shall be extended so that the warranty period does not commence until the Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued.

1.7 COOPERATION OF TRADES


.1 Read Specifications and Drawings of other trades and conform with their requirements before proceeding with any work specified in this Division related to other trades.

.2 Cooperate with all other trades on the job so that all equipment can be satisfactorily installed, so that no delay is caused to any other trade.

.3 Arrange for openings in the walls and floors for transportation and installation of large and heavy equipment. Extra charges for cutting and making good of walls or floors will not be accepted.

.4 Misinterpretation of any requirements of either the drawings or specifications will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to complete the work. If in doubt, contact the Engineer for written clarification prior to submitting tender prices.

1.8 DRAWINGS .1 Drawings which accompany these Specifications are diagrammatic and indicate the general

arrangement of the mechanical systems and work included in the contract. .2 Where the exact locations of equipment are not definitely established, the Contractor shall obtain this

information from the Engineer. .3 Make changes or additions to the mechanical systems as dictated by the Structural or Architectural

Conditions at no extra cost to the Owner.

1.9 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE .1 Means that the item named and specified, forms part of Specification and sets standard regarding

performance, quality of material and workmanship. .2 The Contractor shall include with his tender all equipment specified as "base bid". .3 Where more than one manufacturer is specified, the Contractor may use any of the manufacturers

named with qualification. .4 Where only one manufacturer or supplier is named, alternatives to this manufacturer will only be

considered where submitted as an extra or credit to the "base bid" tender.

1.10 ENERGY CONSUMPTION .1 The Engineer may reject equipment submitted for approval on the basis of performance or energy

consumed or demanded.

1.11 ASBESTOS INSULATION (CHOOSE WHETHER THE OWNER OR CONTRACTOR HAS TO DEAL WITH .1 Asbestos is thought to be present in much of the existing mechanical services insulation. Include in

this contract the required removal of asbestos-containing material to complete the Work. No claims for extra cost will be accepted for area known to contain asbestos containing material.

.2 Asbestos removal and disposal shall be undertaken within the Work by a Contractor specializing in asbestos abatement. Under no circumstances shall others attempt to remove or disturb any asbestos material.

.3 Any Asbestos abatement shall comply in strict accordance with Ontario Regulation 278/05 and any applicable legislation regarding asbestos.

.4 Clearance air testing using the phase contrast microscopy method shall be carried out in all Type 3 Asbestos removal applications.

.5 Comply with additional requirements as described in Section – 13280 Hazardous Materials.

1.12 ALTERATION TO EXISTING .1 Prior to removal and alteration of the existing mechanical systems, the contractor shall identify to the

Engineer at which sections of the existing mechanical equipment and piping shall be cut back and removed.

.2 Relocate existing mechanical equipment and appurtenances as required to suit alteration work, or as specifically indicated on drawings or specified herein. Clean relocated equipment and install in new location, in a neat orderly manner with same attention as given to new equipment.

.3 Obtain written authorization from Engineer for alteration work that is not specifically called for under "Execution" or clearly indicated on drawings.

.4 Where existing material or equipment is damaged during execution of the Work, make good to satisfaction of the Engineer or replace with equivalent new equipment or materials as approved by the Engineer.

.5 When existing material or equipment is disconnected or disassembled to facilitate relocation, reinstall as original, including auxiliary work, piping, valves, gauges, insulation, electrical work, etc.


.6 Where equipment or material is found to be damaged or in an unsuitable condition, notify Engineer for instructions.

.7 Existing mechanical equipment shall be removed to suit new construction and alteration work as indicated on drawings.

.8 Materials removed by this Division shall become Contractor's property and be removed from work site, provided: .1 The item(s) have been inspected by the Owner and released for removal. .2 Item(s) have not been designated for reuse in other sections of specifications or drawings.

1.13 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT .1 Examine the existing building and include in tender price all necessary moneys to remove and legally

dispose of existing equipment as detailed on drawings and specifications.

1.14 HYDRONIC SYSTEM FLUSH AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT .1 Chemically flush hydronic systems according to the sequence and procedures specified in related

sections. .2 Complete system chemical flush prior to the installation of new boilers, chillers, cooling towers or other

major components.

1.15 PROTECTION OF OPENINGS .1 Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials. .2 The Contractor shall protect finished and unfinished work of his own and other subcontractors from

damage due to carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials and equipment supplied under this contract or removed from existing building for reuse and shall provide all necessary protection for same. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and maintenance of the work of this section, until the building has been completed and accepted.

1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 All cutting of openings to walls, floors, roof, ceilings, plaster and drywall ceilings and any other

surfaces or finishes in the structure shall be the responsibility of the Contractor when related to any of the Work. The patching of finished assemblies restricted by the Work of this Division shall be performed by the affected (expert) trade at the expense of the Contractor.

.2 Under no circumstances shall any cutting or burning of the structural parts of the building be undertaken without the written authority of the Engineer.

1.17 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .1 Unions or flanges: provide for ease of maintenance and disassembly. .2 Space for servicing, disassembly and removal of equipment and components: provide as

recommended by manufacturer or as indicated. .3 Equipment drains: pipe to floor drains .4 Install equipment parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. .5 Control panels, electrical panels and wiring termination points provide minimum 40" clearance.

1.18 ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES .1 Supply anchor bolts and templates for installation by other divisions.

1.19 TRIAL USAGE .1 Obtain written permission from Engineer to start and test permanent equipment and systems to

acceptance by Owner. .2 Engineer and Owner may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply

labour, material and instruments required for testing.

1.20 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS WORK .1 Install safety controls and local operating controls for equipment as recommended by manufacturers .2 Conform with additional requirements relating to internal equipment controls as specified in the

appropriate equipment sections. .3 Conform with Section 15916 – Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC for additional

requirements.


1.21 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS .1 Equipment supports supplied by equipment manufacturer: specified elsewhere in Division 15. .2 Equipment supports not supplied by equipment manufacturer: fabricate from structural grade steel

meeting requirements of Structural Steel for Building. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.

.3 Mount base mounted equipment on chamfered edge concrete housekeeping pads, minimum of 4" high and 4" larger than equipment dimensions all around. .1 Etch housekeeping pad (with muriatic acid solution) and rinse with clear water. .2 Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved and allow to dry. .3 Paint concrete housekeeping pads with a water based epoxy; e.g. Glidden True Glaze Epoxy

(WB), color to match surrounding floor as closely as possible.

1.22 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR STEEL PIPING .1 Upper attachments/inserts shall be suitable for application and building construction. .2 Middle attachment carbon steel threaded rod black. .3 Pipe attachment to suit pipe material, horizontal movement and rod length. .4 Hanger spacing:

Pipe Size, NPS Steel Rod Diameter

Maximum Spacing

up to 1-1/4 3/8" 7 ft.1-1/2 3/8" 9 ft.2 3/8" 10 ft.2-1/2 3/8" 12 ft.

.5 Hanger Installation .1 Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions. .2 Adjust hangers to equalize load. .3 Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in

suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.

1.23 PAINTING .1 Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to ferrous supports, site fabricated work and

uninsulated steel pipe for natural gas distribution. .2 Prime and touch up marred finished paint work to match original. .3 Restore to new condition damaged finishes on new materials. .4 Conform with Section 09900 - Boiler Room Painting if included.

1.24 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS .1 Provide where pipes of dissimilar metals are joined. Shall be compatible with and to suit pressure

rating of piping system. .2 Pipes NPS 2 and under shall be with isolating unions. Pipes NPS 2½ and over shall be isolating

flanges. .3 Provide felt or rubber gasket to prevent dissimilar metals contact.

1.25 DRAIN VALVES .1 Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified. .2 Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with

cap and chain.

1.26 DEMONSTRATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS .1 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance

personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.

.2 Where specified elsewhere in Division 15, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions.

.3 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials.

.4 Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.

1.27 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual.

.2 Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by, and final copies deposited with, the Engineer before final inspection.

.3 Operation data to include: .1 Operation instruction for each system and each component. .2 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .3 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .4 Colour coding chart.

.4 Maintenance data shall include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.

.5 Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of operation as left after

commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. .3 Special performance data as specified elsewhere.

.6 Approvals: .1 Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Engineer for approval.

Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless so directed by Engineer. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Engineer.

.7 Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes

apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above.

1.28 CLEANING .1 Upon completion and in preparation for final acceptance, contractor shall remove protective coverings,

clean and refurbish all equipment, free all obstructions, clean strainers and leave in operating condition. All surplus and waste material shall be promptly removed from the premises.

1.29 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Site records:

.1 Obtain from the Engineer one set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Mark on Engineer’s mechanical drawings all changes as the Work progresses and as changes occur.

.2 Make current drawings available for reference purposes and inspection at all times. .2 As-built drawings:

.1 Provide AutoCad "as-built" drawings showing all changes to the design clearly marked in RED ink.

.2 The engineer will complete the revisions in AutoCAD.

1.30 IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify and label only new equipment and pipework services on completion of the project. .2 Natural gas pipe shall be entirely painted in yellow.

1.31 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING .1 Conform to Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) of Mechanical Systems.

END OF 15010


15047 – Identification

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes: Identification including necessary accessories indicated on Construction Documents

and specified in this section or as required for proper identification of equipment and piping.

1. 2 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit properly identified product and technical data including printed installation instructions before

starting work.

1. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Regulatory Requirements:

.1 Color Coding: ANSI Z535.1 (latest edition) shall take precedence over any discrepancies in determining proper color code identification.

.2 Conform to the standards established in ANSI A13.

.3 Comply with OSHA standards.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify equipment served by piping systems by number or legend as shown on Construction

Documents. .1 Provide identification for all components given an identifying code on Construction Documents. .2 Provide identification on all cabinets.

.2 Engraved Plastic Name Plates: Provide engraved laminated plastic name plates with 1 inch high letters on all equipment cabinets.

.3 Brass Tags: Provide 2" square brass tags on equipment where cabinets do not exist, stamped with ½" numbers and letters.

.4 Piping Identification conforming to ASME A13.1 scheme for the identification of pipes. 1. Color Coding: Identify piping with markers and directional arrows according to the following color

coding system: Description Background Letters Hot Water Yellow Black Cold Water Green White Gas Yellow Black Air Blue White Vacuum Green White Steam Yellow Black Nitrogen Green White Oxygen Yellow Black Hydrogen Yellow Black Refrigerant Yellow Black Fire Red White

.2 Piping Identification Materials: Identify contents and flow direction of piping or pipes wrapped with insulation by using: .1 Brady B-946 self-sticking vinyl. .2 Champion America Inc., pressure sensitive vinyl. .3 Seton Opti-Code. .4 Ready Made adhesive pipe markers.

.3 Identify flow direction using arrows on a roll tape, applied to wrap completely around the pipe .1 Apply arrows at each end of each pipe marker to add extra adhesion to the marker

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION


.1 Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

.2 Verify surfaces are clean and dry before application of identification signage.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Brass Tags or Engraved Plastic Name Plates:

.1 Install brass tags or engraved plastic name plates according to manufacturer's instructions. .1 Place brass tags or name plates in locations easily visible within the space at normal eye

level or as otherwise directed by the engineer. .2 Conform to additional requirements in Section

.2 Piping Markers and Directional arrows: .1 Location:

.1 Pipes Passing Through Walls: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows on the pipe on each side of the wall.

.2 Pipes Behind Access Doors/Panels: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows within view.

.3 Continuous Run Pipe Lines: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at intervals not exceeding 50 feet.

.4 Risers and "T" Joints: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at each riser and "T" joint.

.5 Vertical and Horizontal Change of Direction: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at each vertical and horizontal change of direction.

.2 Special Requirements: .1 Directional Arrows: When identifying by directional arrows, point arrow head away from

pipe markers and in the direction of flow. .1 Direction of Flow: If the flow can be in both directions, identify by using doubleheaded

directional arrows. .2 Thin Film Pipe Markers and Thin Film Directional Arrows: When using both thin film pipe

markers and thin film directional arrows on soft insulation, provide a spiral wrap of accepted pipe banding tape around the pipe as foundation for both markers and directional arrows.

END OF 15047


15059 – Cleaning and Protection

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 The GENERAL and SPECIAL CONDITIONS, Section 15010, are included as a part of this Section as

though written in full in this document.


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Clean thoroughly all fixtures and equipment from grease, dirt, plaster or any other foreign material.

Chrome-plated fittings, piping and trim shall be polished upon completion. .2 Any dirt, rubbish, or grease on walls, floors or fixtures accumulated from the work of the Mechanical

Division shall be removed promptly from the premises by this Division. .3 Fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected from damage during the construction period and

shall be cleaned and polished in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Motors and equipment bearings shall be protected with plastic sheets, tied or taped in place. Aluminum fin heating or cooling elements shall be protected with cardboard covers.

.4 Any unpainted steel surfaces, installed for longer than one year prior to the completion date, shall be prime coated under this Division.

.5 During construction protect all services and equipment from dirt and debris, by using temporary caps over the open ends of pipes, ductwork, and equipment connections.

.6 All equipment installed or stored on site shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturers recommended instructions (i.e. rotate shafts on fans, pumps, etc).

.7 Refinish and restore to the original condition and appearance all mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of enamel or paint. Materials and workmanship shall be equal to the manufacturers original.

END OF 15059


15080 – Cutting and Patching

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .1 This Section shall apply for openings required in existing construction. .2 Include for all cutting and patching for all mechanical services for holes and openings.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 All services and materials used for the cutting and patching shall be carried out by professional

workers experienced in the cutting and patching work to be done. .2 Firestopping: in accordance with Section 07840 – Firestopping. .3 Smoke Sealing: where non-fire separation rated walls are penetrated, the contractor shall seal such

penetrations with a suitable material to meet the OBC requirements for smoke diffusion.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Locate all openings in non structural elements requiring cutting and patching in a timely manner to

avoid unnecessary cutting. .2 Where drywall surfaces are to be cut and repaired, provide heavy duty tarps on the floor and provide

dust control measures to ensure that dust does not migrate to adjoining areas of the facility. Full clean up of all dust created during this work will be the responsibility of the contractor upon completion of each work section, area or daily shift.

.3 Core drilling for individual services shall be no larger than is required for the services.

.4 Locate all openings in structure elements requiring cutting and patching and x-ray or scan the structure to obtain Structural Consultant's approval prior to cutting or core drilling of existing structure. Make adjustments to location of openings as required to minimize cutting of rebar and completely avoid electrical conduit. .1 Cut holes through slabs only. .2 Do not cut holes through beams. .3 Maintain at least 100mm (4 in.) clear from all beam faces. Space at least 3 hole diameters on

Centre. .4 For holes that are required closer than 25% of slab span from the supporting beam face, use

cover meter above the slab to clear slab top bars. .5 For holes that are required within 50% of slab span, use cover meter underside of slab to clear

slab bottom bars. .6 X-rays or scans shall be performed by a qualified technician, in a safe manner and in

accordance with all applicable regulations governing this activity. .5 Patch all openings after services have been installed to match the surrounding finishes. .6 Apply firestopping or alternative sealing materials to meet all OBC requirements

END OF 15080


15081 – Thermal Insulation for Piping

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Components of insulation system to have maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke

developed rating of 50 in accordance with CAN/ULC S102.

1.2 DEFINITIONS .1 For purposes of this section only:

.1 "CONCEALED" insulated mechanical pipework and ductwork services and equipment in hung ceilings, roof spaces and non-accessible chases and furred spaces.

.2 "EXPOSED" will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.

1.3 SERVICES TO BE INSULATED .1 Pipework

.1 New hydronic heating pipework shall be insulated in all locations. All existing uninsulated heating and domestic hot water piping in mechanical rooms shall be insulated and jacketed.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMED MINERAL FIBER WITH VAPOUR BARRIER TO 200°C .1 Application: for piping, valves, press joint couplings, fittings, and brazed-plate heat exchangers on

hydronic heating system. .2 Material: CGSB 51 GP 9M rigid mineral fiber sleeving for piping. .3 Thermal Conductivity "k" shall not exceed 0.034 W/m°C at 24°C mean temperature when tested in

accordance with ASTM C335. Thickness as the following schedule. .1 All interior building piping to be installed shall have 1” (25mm) insulation. .2 All crawl space piping shall have 2” (50mm) insulation.

.4 Fastenings: .1 Self adhesive aluminium tape ULC labelled for less than 25 flame spread and less than 50 smoke

developed. .2 Contact adhesive: quick setting for seams and joints. .3 Tape: self adhesive PVC.

.5 On applications below 120°C, rigid phenolic insulation of an equal or greater insulating value may be accepted as alternate with Engineer’s approval, with same jacket and labels. Approved Product: Kingspan Koolphen K.

2.2 PVC JACKETS .1 Application: for piping straight lengths, piping elbows, valves, press joint couplings, fittings, and

brazed-plate heat exchangers on hydronic heating system. .2 White PVC jacket 0.38 mm minimum thickness, c/w fluid and flow direction labels. .3 Fastenings standard to manufacturer. .4 Meeting 25 flame spread and 50 smoke development ratings.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL .1 Work shall be performed by contractor whose principal business is that of commercial and industrial

insulating. .2 Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Engineer. Surfaces shall

be clean and dry during application of insulation and finishes. .3 Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and as specified. .4 Vapor barriers and insulation to be unbroken over full length of pipe, duct or equipment surface,

without penetration for hangers, standing duct seams and without interruption at sleeves, pipe and fittings and supports.

.5 Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.


.6 On piping with insulation and vapor barrier, install high density insulation under hanger shield. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier over full length of pipe and duct without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports. Apply 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal corners to all ductwork in mechanical rooms.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION .1 Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B. .2 Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement. .3 Flanges and unions at equipment valves and other components requiring regular maintenance, install

insulation and finish to permit easy disassembly and replacement without damage to adjacent insulation and finishes.

.4 Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not greater than 36" on centers.

.5 Where approved alternate insulation is used, follow manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.

.6 Insulation is not required for: .1 Chrome plated piping, valves, and fittings .2 Runouts to plumbing fixtures .3 Pump and circulator bodies

3.4 PVC PIPE JACKETS .1 Apply to all new insulated pipe in accordance with CGSB 51 GP 53M. .2 Fitting covers, one piece, premoulded to match. .3 Fastenings standard to manufacturer.

END OF 15081


15094 – Hangers and Supports

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 The GENERAL and SPECIAL CONDITIONS, Section 15010 (16010), are included as a part of this

Section as though written in full in this document.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Piping and equipment provided under the Mechanical Division shall be complete with all necessary

supports and hangers required for a safe and workmanlike installation. .2 Hangers, supports, anchors, guides, and restraints shall be selected to withstand all static and

dynamic loading conditions which act upon the piping system and associated equipment. The Mechanical Division shall prepare detailed shop drawings showing all anchors and guides for all systems with the potential for thermal expansion/contraction and/or loads due to weight or thrust. The drawings shall bear the signed seal of a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the appropriate discipline and place of work. The drawings shall include all details of construction, static and dynamic forces at points of attachment, etc. necessary for review and acceptance by the project Structural Consultant. Make adjustments as necessary to satisfy the requirements of the Structural Division. No anchor points shall be permitted without reviewed shop drawings and, where installed prior to review, shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .1 Provide hangers and supports manufactured by Anvil International or E. Myatt & Co. .2 All pipe hangers and supports shall be manufactured to the latest requirements of MSS-SP- 58.

Where applicable, design and manufacture of hangers and supports shall also conform to ANSI/ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.

.3 Pipe rolls shall have cast iron rollers, shaped to accept the outside diameter of the insulated pipe. Roll shall either rotate on a steel shaft mounted on a cast iron stand or shall roll on a cast iron bed plate.

.4 Roof supports for duct runs greater than 30 ft. shall be Thaler Roof Specialities.

.5 Roof supports for duct runs less than 30 ft. shall be Thaler Roof Specialities or Portable Pipe Hangers Inc.

.6 Roof supports for pipe runs shall be Thaler Roof Specialties or ABI (A Better Idea) premade rubber-coated roof blocks.

.7 All hangers, supports, brackets and other devices installed exterior to the building shall be galvanized to prevent failure from environmental corrosion. If galvanized components cannot be used submit samples of proposed substitute for review prior to installation.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow

free expansion and contraction of the piping. .2 Piping shall be supported from walls, beams, columns, and slabs using approved structural

attachments. In situations where approved attachments cannot be used, alternative attachments or substructure assemblies shall receive approval prior to installation. Prior approval shall be given for any cutting or drilling of building structural steel. Damage or modification to the structure through welding, cutting, or drilling shall not be permitted if it reduces the integrity of the building structure as deemed by the Structural Consultant. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Division to supply anchor bolts and base diagrams for equipment and pipe supports showing exact location of attachments.

.3 All drilling for hangers, rod inserts and work of similar nature shall be done by this Division.

.4 Auxiliary structural members shall be provided under the Mechanical Section concerned where piping, ducts or equipment must be suspended between the joists or beams of the structure, or where required to replace individual hanger to allow for installation on new services. Submit details for review as requested.


.5 Depending on the type of structure, hangers shall be either clamped to steel beams or joists, or attached to approved concrete inserts. Submit proposed hanger details for review and acceptance by the Structural Consultant. Make adjustments as necessary to satisfy the requirements of the Structural Division.

.6 Approved type expansion shields and bolts may be used for pipe up to 100 mm (4 in.) diameter where the presetting of concrete inserts is not practical. Submit proposed hanger details for review and acceptance by the Structural Consultant. Make adjustments as necessary to satisfy the requirements of the Structural Division.

.7 Suspension from metal deck shall not be allowed unless specifically accepted by the Consultant. Drawings of the proposed method of suspension must be submitted for review.

.8 Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. Suspended piping shall be supported by adjustable hanger rods sized as follows:

Pipe Size Hanger Rod Diameter 50 mm (2 in.) and under 9 mm (3/8 in.) 65 mm (2-1/2 in.) and 75 mm (3 in.) 12 mm (1/2 in.) 100 mm (4 in.) and 125 mm (5 in.) 16 mm (5/8 in.) 150 mm (6 in.) 19 mm (3/4 in.) 200 mm (8 in.) to 300 mm (12 in.) 22 mm (7/8 in.)

.9 Unless otherwise specified or shown hanger spacing for all services shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Span Up to and including 25 mm (1 in.) 2.1 m (7 ft.) 32 mm (1-1/4 in.) to 125 mm (5 in.) 3 m (10 ft.) 150 mm (6 in.) and larger 4.6 m (15 ft.)

In addition, provide a hanger within 600 mm (2 ft.) on each side of valves on pipes over 38mm (1½ in.) diameter, elbows or tees.

.10 Hanger spacing for plumbing and drainage services shall be in accordance with the plumbing code.

.11 Hanger spacing for fire protection services shall be in accordance with the N.F.P.A. codes.

.12 All horizontal piping 50 mm (2 in.) diameter and larger shall be supported by adjustable wrought iron clevis type hangers. Smaller piping shall be supported by adjustable split ring hangers or clevis type hangers.

.13 Suspending one hanger from another shall not be permitted.

.14 For steam piping 50 mm (2 in.) and larger, use a standard catalogue protection saddle tack welded to the pipe, which provides a space between the pipe and hanger equal to the thickness of the insulation.

.15 For hot water or steam piping 38 mm (1-1/2 in.) and smaller, use line size hangers.

.16 For cold water services such as domestic cold water, chilled water pipe on dual chilled and hot water pipe 25mm (1 in.) and smaller, install a section of high density insulation complete with continuous vapour barrier between the pipe and the hanger. Refer to Section 15081 - Thermal Insulation for Piping.

.17 For cold water services such as domestic cold water, chilled water pipe or dual chilled and hot water pipe larger than 25mm (1 in.), use a galvanized steel shield between the insulation and the hanger. Between the shield and the pipe, install a section of high density insulation complete with continuous vapour barrier. Refer to Section 15081 - Thermal Insulation for Piping. The shield width shall be minimum 1/4 of the pipe circumference. The length and gauge shall be as follows: .1 150 mm (6 in.) long and 14 US gauge for pipe larger than 25mm (1in.) up to 50 mm (2 in.)

diameter .2 250 mm (10 in.) long and 12 US gauge for pipes 65 mm (2-1/2 in.) to 300 mm (12 in.) diameter .3 300 mm (12 in.) long and 10 US gauge for pipes 350 mm (14 in.) to 400 mm (16 in.) diameter

.18 Hangers and riser clamps in contact with copper pipe shall be copper coated construction or plastic coated. Taped hangers and riser clamps shall not be accepted.

.19 Unless otherwise specified or shown, all pipes supported from below shall be mounted on pipe rolls or pipe slides.

.20 Pipe slides shall be complete with carbon steel structural tees, PTFE bonded slide plates with carbon steel base. Structural Tees shall be welded to the pipe or to the protection saddle as shown.

.21 Other means of support shall be as shown or as specified hereunder.

.22 For special equipment supports refer to equipment sections. Where no support method is identified, secure wall mounted equipment to metal framing or masonry with steel toggle or expansion fasteners, machine screws, or sheet metal screws as applicable. Plastic, fibre or soft metal inserts shall not be acceptable. Wall mounted equipment shall not exceed 45.5 Kg (100 lbs) in weight or 250mm (10") in


depth unless reviewed or detailed by the Consultant. Where framing does not permit direct attachment, provide metal strut sub-framing or minimum 19mm (3/4 in.) fire retardant treated plywood backboards, unpainted, attached to the framing. Provide attachments for backboards at 600 mm (24 in.) on centres with no less than 4 attachments.

END OF 15094


15101 – Installation of Pipework

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product:

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER COPPER PIPING, FITTINGS AND VALVES – WITHIN BUILDING .1 Pipe-above ground: copper tube hard drawn, type L to ASTM B88M. .2 Fittings

.1 Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI B16.24.

.2 Cast bronze threaded Class 125 and 250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15.

.3 Cast copper, solder type fittings: to ANSI B16.18.

.4 Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.

.5 Grooved fittings shall be copper per ASTM B-75 alloy C12200 and ANSI B16-22; bronze sand castings per ASTM B 584 copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ANSI B16.18. Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic.

.3 Joints .1 Rubber gaskets, 1/16” thick: to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. .2 Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series. .3 Solder/brazing: tin/antimony 95/5, to contain less than 0.2% lead and to suit application. .4 Teflon tape: for threaded joints .5 Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used

as an option to brazing, soldering, threading or flanged methods. All grooved components shall conform to local code approval.Manufacturer: Victaulic Style 606 or Style 607 “QuickVic”.

.4 Valves .1 Swing check valves

.1 NPS 2 and under, soldered: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat. Manufacturer: Kitz 23, Toyo 237.

.2 NPS 2 and under, screwed: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap, regrindable seat. Manufacturer: Kitz 22, Toyo 236.

.3 NPS 2 1/2 and over flanged: MSS SP-71, Class 125, full faced, flanged ends cast-iron body, regrindable seat, bronze disc, bolted cap. Manufacturer: Kitz 78, Toyo 435.

.4 NPS 2 ½ and over,Class125, 200WOG, Cast iron body, single strainless steel CF8M disc and hinge pin, viton seat. Manufacturer: Moyogro W12A 16V.

.2 Backflow preventer .1 Install on potable makeup water lines, sized for service, and as required by local codes and

standards. Manufacturer: Conbraco .3 Ball valves

.1 NPS 2 and under, screwed: MSS SP 110, 600 WOG, bronze or brass body, full port chrome plated ball, double O ring or teflon packing, teflon seats, and steel handle. Manufacturer: Kitz 58, Toyo 5044A, MAS B-3, Apollo 70-100.

.2 NPS 2 and under, soldered: MSS SP 110, 600 WOG, bronze or brass body, full port solid chrome ball, double O ring or teflon packing, teflon seats, and steel handle. Manufacturer: Kitz 59, Toyo 5049A, MAS B-4, Apollo 70-200.

.4 Butterfly valves .1 NPS 2 ½ and over, MSS SP 67, Lug body, 200 psi dead end service, lever up to 6”, gear

8” and over. Ductile iron body, stainless steel shaft, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM liner. Manufacturer; Kitz 6122EL/G, Toyo 918BESL/G, Apollo 143, Demco.

.2 Grooved end valves: 2-1/2" - 6" Victaulic Series 608 Butterfly valve, 300 psi (2065 kPa), CTS grooved ends. Cast bronze body to CDA-836 (85-5-5-5). Ductile iron disc, ASTM A-536, synthetic rubber encapsulated suited for the intended service. Seat test to MSS-SP- 67. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service. With memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. Manufacturer: Victaulic.

2.2 STEEL PIPING, FITTINGS AND VALVES - HYDRONIC SYSTEMS .1 Pipe: Steel pipe to ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40.


.2 Pipe Joints .1 NPS 2 and under: screwed fittings with Teflon tape. .2 NPS 2 1/2 and over: welding fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1 and CSA W47.1S1. .3 Flanges: plain or raised face. .4 Orifice flanges: slip on raised face. .5 Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used

as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods on hydronic heating, chilled water, condenser, glycol, vent, relief and above ground drain piping from equipment. All grooved components shall conform to local code approval.

.6 Grooved mechanical rigid couplings shall be Victaulic Style 07 or Style 107 “QuickVic” rigid coupling or equal. Rigid couplings shall be of the angle pattern bolt pad type, and shall provide system support and hanging requirements in accordance with ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.4. Style 77 or 75 coupling shall be used where system flexibility is desired. Noise and vibration reduction at mechanical equipment connections is achieved by installing three style 77 or 75 flexible couplings near the vibration source

.7 Roll grooved: standard or rigid coupling to CSA B242 and as appropriate to pipe material, wall thickness, pressures, size and method of joining.

.8 Flange gaskets: to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

.9 Pipe thread taper.

.10 Bolts and nuts: to ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI/ASME B18.2.2. .3 Fittings

.1 Screwed fittings: malleable iron, to ANSI/ASME B16.3, Class 150.

.2 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings: .1 Cast iron: to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125. .2 Steel: to ANSI/ASME B16.5.

.3 Butt welding fittings: steel, to ANSI/ASME B16.9.

.4 Unions: malleable iron, to ASTM A47M and ANSI/ASME B16.3.

.5 Fittings for rolled grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47M or ductile iron to ASTM A536. .4 Valves

.1 Ball Valves .1 NPS 2 and under, screwed: MSS SP 110, 600 WOG, bronze or brass body, full port

chrome plated solid ball, double O ring or teflon packing, teflon seats, and steel handle. .2 Manufacturer: Kitz 58, Toyo 5044A, MAS B-3, Apollo 70-100.

.2 Butterfly Valves .1 NPS 2 1/2 and over, lug body: to MSS SP 67, 200 psi dead end service, lever up to 6 inch,

gear 8 inch and over. Ductile iron body, stainless steel shaft, aluminum bronze or nickel coated ductile disc, replaceable EPDM liner.

.2 Manufacturer: Kitz 6122EL/G, Toyo 918BESL/G, Apollo 143, Demco.

.3 Grooved end: 2 1/2 and larger where grooved end piping systems are allowed, shall be rated to 300 psi and be both bi-directional and dead-end service capable to full rated pressure. Body material shall be ductile iron with blow-out proof stainless steel stems and electroless nickel coated ductile iron disc. Seat material shall be EPDM rated to rated to 250 deg. F or 121 deg. C (or lubricated nitrile or fluoroelastomer). Valve shall have standard ISO flange mounting for actuator and may be used with automated control actuators. Manufacturer: Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSeal.

.3 Swing Check Valves .1 NPS 2 and under, screwed: to MSS SP 80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze swing disc,

screw in cap, regrindable seat. .2 Manufacturer: Kitz 22, Toyo 236 .3 NPS 2 1/2 and up, flanged: to MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, FF flange, renewable

seat, bronze disc, bolted cap. .4 Manufacturer: Kitz 78, Toyo 435. .5 Grooved 2”-4”: Horizontal installation. Working pressure to 300 psi (2065 kPa). Ductile

iron body, ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, and 316 stainless steel clapper. EPDM, Nitrile or optional Viton Bumper & Bonnet seals. Stainless steel wetted parts. Manufacturer: Victaulic Series 712.

.6 Grooved 4”-14”: Black enamel painted ductile iron body, ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, ductile iron disc, elastomer encapsulated suited for the


intended service, stainless steel spring and shaft, welded-in nickel seat, 300 psi (2065 kPa). Valve inlet is drilled, with venturi-like taps and plugged for flow kit (included with valve). Twin taps on both sides of valve for meter connections and flow measurement. Manufacturer: Victaulic Series 779.

.4 Silent Check Valves NOTE: Do not use directly on discharge of reciprocating compressor. .1 NPS 2 and under: Class 125, 200 WOG, bronze or brass body, stainless steel spring, tefon

or bronze disc. .2 Manufacturer: MAS 700, Kitz 36. .3 NPS 2-1/2 and over: Class 125, 200 WOG, cast iron wafer body, center guided shaft,

stainless steel spring, bronze disc. .4 Manufacturer: Mueller steam 101 MAP, 105 MAP (Globe Style).

2.3 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES .1 Automatic Air Eliminators

.1 Cast iron body and NPS 3/4" connection and rated at 150 psi working pressure. Stainless steel float suitable for 240°F working temperature.

.2 Manufacturer: Spirax Sarco 13W, Armstrong equivalent .2 Pipe Line Strainer

.1 NPS 1/2 to 2: y-type, cast bronze body, threaded connections, solid retainer cap with straight thread and gasket, 20 mesh stainless steel screen, blowdown connection and pressure 125 psi WSP at 400°F.

.2 NPS 2 1/2 to 12: y-type, cast iron body, flanged connections, iron retainer cap and gasket, stainless steel screen with 1/16" perforation, straight threads and tapped for closure plug, blowoff outlet and pressure Class 125, WSP 125 psi at 450°F.

.3 Grooved: 300 PSI (2065 kPa) Y-Type Strainer shall consist of ductile iron body, ASTM A-395, grade 65-45-15, and ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, Type 304 stainless steel cylindrical removable baskets with 1/16" (1,6mm) diameter perforations and 41% open area 2"-3" (DN50-DN80) strainer sizes or 1/8" (3,2mm) diameter perforations and 40% open area 4"-12" (DN100-DN300) strainer sizes.

.3 Direct Reading Thermometers .1 Industrial variable angle type, liquid filled, 9" scale length. Design point to be at mid point of

scale or range. .2 Thermometer wells for copper pipe shall be copper or bronze and for steel pipe shall be brass or

stainless steel. .3 Acceptable manufacturers: Trerice, Winters.

.4 Pressure Gauges With Glycerine .1 4½" dial type having 1/2 of 1% accuracy unless otherwise specified. Provide snubber for

pulsating operation, diaphragm assembly for corrosive service, gasketted pressure relief back with solid front and bronze stop cock. Shall be oil filled for high vibration applications.

.5 Circuit Balancing Valves .1 Bronze body up to 2" sweat and threaded and cast iron body 2 1/2" to 4" flanged connections.

Teflon seats, calibrated nameplate with tamper resistant field adjustable memory stop, schrader style pressure ports and drain port. Pressure/temperature rating ½”- 2”: 250psi/250°F, 2 1/2” to 4”: Class 125. Manufacturer: TA Hydronics

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION – DOMESTIC WATER WITHIN BUILDING .1 Boiler Make-up water.

.1 Install in accordance with Ontario Building Code and Local Authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Support all piping as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Piping which does not bear certification markings will be rejected by Engineer and shall be replaced with an approved material at the contractor’s expense.

.4 Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings an assemble without binding.


.5 Where possible install piping close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

.6 Make connections to equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.7 Isolate equipment, branches with ball valves.

.8 Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction. After testing, provide acceptable water quality test report.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION – HYDRONIC SYSTEMS .1 Piping

.1 Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.

.2 Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping wherever practical. Coordinate installation of piping with sprinkler lines and heads and light fixtures.

.3 Slope piping in direction of drainage and for positive venting.

.4 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting.

.5 Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings.

.6 Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.

.7 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.8 Install dielectric couplings at all points of contact of dissimilar metals, including contact of brass valves with steel pipe.

.9 All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer.

.10 Apply grooved fitting manufacturer lubricant to gaskets prior to installation on to pipe. Make arrangements with the grooved coupling and fitting manufacturer for shop and or on-site training as required for pipe preparation and coupling installation. Comply with manufacturer's latest published specifications, instructions and recommendations.

.11 Grooved joint piping shall NOT be permitted in the corridor space. .2 Flushing and Cleaning

.1 Flush after pressure test for a minimum of 4 h.

.2 Fill with solution of water and non foaming, phosphate free detergent 3% solution by weight. Circulate for minimum of 8 h.

.3 Drain and flush for 4 h. Remove all strainer screens/baskets and clean.

.4 Install temporary strainer filter media for small particle removal.

.5 Refill system with clean water and circulate minimum 2 h.

.6 Drain and flush for 2 h. Remove strainer filter media and dispose. Re-install strainer screens/baskets after obtaining Ecosystem’s approval.

.3 Filling of System .1 Refill system with clean water, adding Aquarian water treatment as specified by vendor.

.4 Valves .1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal. .2 Install ball valves at all branch take offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as

indicated. .3 Label each balancing valve with a waterproof plastic tag, showing ID code, dial setting, flow, and

date of balancing. Attach the tag securely with a tie-wrap or similar device capable of withstanding the temperatures that the valve will experience in operation.

.5 Automation Controls Accessories .1 All automation control valves and other automation devices to be installed in hydronic piping

systems and equipment will be supplied by others and installed by piping contractor. .2 Piping contractor shall install female-threaded thermal wells in new piping locations as shown on

schematics. Coordinate with Ecosystem for suitable locations. .6 Testing

.1 Prior to testing, remove foreign matter, flush piping and equipment using compressed air.

.2 Pressure test with water to 125 psig and hold for 4 h. Submit certificate of tests and test results to Ecosystem.

.3 Repeat repair and testing until system tightness is established and pressure test is successful. .7 Coordination of Components


.1 Check shop drawings for conformance of all tappings for ancillaries and for equipment operating weights.

3.3 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES .1 Automatic Air Eliminators

.1 Install at high points of systems.

.2 Install ball valve on automatic air vent inlet .2 Strainers

.1 Install in horizontal or down flow lines.

.2 Ensure clearance for removal of basket. .3 Thermometers

.1 Install in wells on all piping. Provide heat conductive material inside well.

.2 Install in locations as indicated on drawings.

.3 Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation. .4 Pressure Gauges

.1 Install in locations as indicated on drawings

.2 Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation. .5 Pressure Safety Relief Valves

.1 Pipe discharge directly over but not into the nearest floor drain. Discharge height shall be between 6” and 12” over the drain opening, so that any discharging shall be clearly visible.

.6 Circuit Balancing Valves .1 Install in the pipe section indicated. Ensure a minimum of two diameters downstream of straight

pipe without fittings or bends. Ensure a minimum five diameters upstream of straight pipe without fittings or bends, and a minimum of ten diameters upstream from any pump discharge.

.2 Install with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body, with easy access to the probe metering ports and the adjustment handwheel.

.3 In horizontal installations, ensure that metering ports are installed above the pipe or in an upward orientation to prevent the accumulation of sediment in the ports.

END OF 15101


15131 – Pumps - Hydronic Systems

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit shop drawings and product data. .2 Submit manufacturer's detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory

installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories and controllers.

.3 Submit product data of pump curves for review showing point of operation. For pumps operating in parallel, submit shop drawings showing both single and parallel pump operation.

.4 Pump volute shall be sized for a maximum of 17 fps velocity. When a pump cannot meet this requirement the manufacturer shall clearly indicate this on the shop drawing and include a written explanation as to why the particular pump has been selected.

.5 Design pump operating efficiency is indicated on schedules. When a pump cannot meet or exceed the design efficiency, the manufacturer shall clearly indicate this on the shop drawing and include a written explanation as to why the particular pump has been selected.

.6 Indicate piping, valves and fittings shipped loose by packaged equipment supplier, showing their final location in field assembly.

1.2 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1.3 POTABLE WATER SERVICE .1 Pumps for potable water service shall be as indicated in applicable clauses herein except they shall be

fabricated with bronze body and bronze impeller.

1.4 SCHEDULES .1 Specific pump selections are shown on schedules on drawings. Where schedules are in conflict with

these specifications, the schedule shall take precedence.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALL HYDRONIC PUMPS .1 Seal flushing connection complete with filter or cyclone separator and sight flow indicator to suit

system working conditions shall be provided on all pumps 7.5 kW (10 hp) and over. Filter shall be sized to suit the flow rate required for the seal.

.2 Select motors to be non-overloading over the entire pump curve.

.3 Bearings shall be grease or oil lubricated type. Permanently lubricated bearings are not acceptable.

.4 Pump volute sized for a maximum of 17 fps velocity.

.5 For heating systems with operating temperatures greater than 82.2 deg. C. (180 deg. F.) and for condenser water systems, use Tungsten Carbide seals.

2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS .1 Volute: cast iron radially split with flanged tapped ports design suction and discharge connections. .2 Maximum operating temperature 250°F and maximum operating pressure 175 psig. .3 Cast bronze impeller, centrifugal type, dynamically and hydraulically balanced. .4 Cupro-nickel shaft sleeve, replaceable bearing cartridge, flexible coupler and standard mechanical

seal. .5 Motor shall be open-drip proof enclosure, NEMA standard and resilient mount. .6 Where indicated, provide inverter-duty motors designed for use with variable frequency motor drives.

Standard or normal high-efficiency motors will not be accepted in these situations. .7 Acceptable Material: Armstrong, ITT/Bell & Gossett, Grundfos, Taco will be accepted as equal.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


.1 In line circulators: install as indicated by flow arrows. Support at inlet and outlet flanges or unions. Install with bearing lubrication points accessible.

.2 Base mounted type: supply templates for anchor bolt placement. Furnish anchor bolts with sleeves. Place level, shim unit and grout. Align coupling in accordance with manufacturer's recommended tolerance. Check oil level and lubricate. After run-in, tighten glands.

.3 Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or hangers for this purpose. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.

.4 Increasers and reducers on pump suction and discharge shall be of a gradual increase or reduction to prevent unnecessary turbulence or noise. Horizontal increasers and reducers shall be eccentric fittings. Vertical increasers and reducers shall be concentric fittings.

.5 Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.

.6 Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.

.7 Check rotation prior to start-up.

.8 Install pressure gauge test cocks.

END OF 15131


15179 – Pipe System Filters

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 The following pertains to pipe system filters or side-stream filters that are designed to provide for the

removal of debris from the piping system and are in addition to the installed strainers as described in Section 15101 – Installation of Pipework.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Provide pipe system filters equal to Ashland Drew Low Flow Micron Filters Series 9238-02-4 or

Filterite LMO Series. .2 Provide pipe system filters equal to Ashland Drew Micron Medium Flow Filters Series 9240/9241or GE

W&P Technologies 3CMC/6CMC. .3 Shell and heads shall be suitable for 1035 kPa (150 psi) working pressure and filter media shall be

suitable for 149 deg. C. (300 deg. F.) service temperature. .4 Filter media shall be bleached cotton for selective removal of particles from 1 to 100 microns. Media

shall be non-rupturing and mounted so that no by-pass of media shall occur. Filters shall be equal to Ashland Drew PN 9236 or Viper VPYC.

.5 Filters shall be sized for 3% of total system flow and shall be within the mid-capacity of the filter operating flow rate.

.6 Pipe system filters shall be installed in the following systems: .1 Perimeter heating systems and dual temperature systems.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install pipe system filters across the pumps with valved inlet and outlet. Outlet valve shall be a flow

balancing valve. Provide flanges or unions for servicing. Provide valved drain on unit casing. .2 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with the requirements

of the water treatment program as outlined in other sections. .3 Install as indicated.

END OF 15179


15181 – Hydronic Specialties

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Expansion Tanks .2 Air Separators

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 15101 – Installation of Pipework.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASME (BPV VIII, 1) – Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 – Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2006.

1.4 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for

this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

.2 Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction.

.3 Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

.4 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.

.5 Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Accept equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. .2 Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation. .3 Protect piping components from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE .1 Contractor to furnish service and maintenance for one year from date of substantial

Performance.

1.8 WARRANTY .1 Provide a one (1) year parts and service warranty.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 ASME FULL BLADDER TYPE EXPANSION TANKS .1 Manufactures:

.1 Taco, Inc

.2 ITT Bell & Gossett

.3 Amtrol Inc

.4 Armstrong .2 Construction: Welded steel, designed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV

code sec VIII, div 1); supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 150 psi , with flexible heavy duty butyl rubber bladder. Bladder shall be able to accept the full


volume of the expansion tank and shall be removable and replaceable. Bladder shall be NSF 61 rated for low temperature potable water service and shall be manufactured with FDA approved materials.

.3 Accessories: Pressure gage (field installed in adjacent piping by others) and air-charging fitting ; precharged as indicated on equipment schedule.

.4 Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly (field installed by others): Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.

2.2 AIR SEPARATORS .1 Manufacturers:

.1 Taco, Inc;

.2 Spirotherm.

.3 Armstrong .2 Air removal device shall be constructed of steel. It shall be designed, fabricated and stamped

per ASME Section VIII Division 1 with a maximum working pressure of 150 psi at 270°F. Manufacturer shall be holder of ASME U stamp. Manufacturer to have optional 250 psi and 125 psi ASME units available. Units 3 inch and larger shall be provided with flanged system connections as standard. 2 inch and 2½ inch models to be provided with NPT connections. These connections shall be inline with the mechanical room piping. The unit shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer.

.3 The unit shall have a top NPT connection to allow for the tie in of automatic air vent, make up water, and compression tank (air control system). This fitting shall be at the upper most point on the chamber. There shall be a bottom connection for blowdown cleaning.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION TANKS .1 Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. .2 Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. .3 Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. .4 For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to

nearest drain. .5 Air separator and expansion tank to be installed on the suction side of the system pumps.

Expansion tank to be tied into system piping in close proximity to air separator and system fill line.

.6 Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

.7 Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks.

.8 Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.

.9 Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

.10 Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas.

3.2 AIR SEPARATOR .1 Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

END OF 15181


15188 – HVAC Water Treatment Systems

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes:

.1 Materials, components, equipment and chemicals for installation of complete HVAC water treatment system.

.2 Establish, monitor, and correct heating water chemistry for safe and proper operation, to minimize erosion, scale, fouling, or other negative consequences of improper water chemistry.

.3 Ensure that water chemistry is always within boiler manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Ensure that the warranty for all boilers remains fully in force and is not compromised by water chemistry issues.

.2 Related Sections: .1 15101 – Installation of Pipework .2 15131 – Pumps – Hydronic Systems .3 15179 – Pipe System Filters

1.2 REFERENCES .1 All codes and standards listed below are meant to refer to the latest edition adopted by the authority

having jurisdiction as it relates to the Work. .2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

.1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VII. .3 Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Include specific scheduling and chemical recommendations for ongoing water treatment program

.3 To include testing and control of pH, bio-count, chloride, alkalinity, conductivity, and total hardness.

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .3 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Testing log sheets as recommended by water treatment contractor.

.2 Following the chemical treatment and after allowing time for chemistry stabilization, submit water chemistry test results.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Packing, shipping, handling, and unloading:

.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for recycling and dispose of in a safe and legal manner.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL .1 Equipment, chemicals, service provided by one supplier, as approved by Owner. .2 Qualified water treatment contractor shall provide the necessary chemicals to implement a water

treatment program suitable for the equipment being installed and the water supply for makeup. .3 The water treatment program shall serve to limit corrosion and control the water quality including

management of the following parameters:


.1 Alkalinity (both P and M scales)

.2 Chlorides

.3 Ph

.4 Conductivity

.5 Phosphonates

.6 Hardness

2.2 POT FEEDER .1 Welded steel, pressure rating 1200 kPa. Temperature rating: 90°C.

2.3 CHEMICAL FEED PIPING .1 Resistant to chemicals employed. Pressure rating: 1200 kPa.

2.4 CHEMICAL CONTAINERS .1 High density moulded polyethylene, with liquid level graduations, cover.

2.5 WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS .1 Hot water heating system: pot feeder, 19 L, operating pressure 1200 kPa. .2 Chilled water system: pot feeder, 19 L, operating pressure 1200 kPa. .3 Glycol system: pot feeder, 19 L, operating pressure 1200 kPa. .4 Micron filter for each pot feeder:

.1 Capacity 2% of pump recirculating rate at operating pressure.

.2 Six (6) sets of filter cartridges for each type, size of micron filter.

2.6 CHEMICALS .1 Provide one (1) years’ supply to be stored on site in the mechanical room.

2.7 TEST EQUIPMENT .1 Provide one set of test equipment for each system to verify performance. .2 Complete with carrying case, reagents for chemicals, specialized or supplementary equipment.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product

technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install HVAC water treatment systems in accordance with ASME Boiler Code Section VII, and

requirements and standards of authorities having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise. .2 Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of equipment.

3.3 CHEMICAL FEED PIPING .1 Install crosses at changes in direction. Install plugs in unused connections. .2 Provide connection across primary distribution pump (or pumps where lead/lag), or as indicated.

3.4 CLEANING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM .1 Flush mechanical systems and equipment with approved cleaning chemicals designed to remove

deposition from construction such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials. Use chemicals to inhibit corrosion of various system materials that are safe to handle and use.

.2 Examine and clean filters and screens, periodically during circulation of cleaning solution, and monitor changes in pressure drop across equipment.

.3 Drain and flush system[s] until alkalinity of rinse water is equal to make-up water. Refill with clean water treated to prevent scale and corrosion during system operation.

.4 Disposal of cleaning solutions approved by authority having jurisdiction.

3.5 CHEMICAL TREATMENT .1 Upon completion of system cleaning and flushing, fill with clean fresh water, softened if necessary to

meet hardness range.


.1 If fill water is softened, use an inhibitor in combination with the softening according to the chemical supplier’s recommendations.

.2 Add chemicals following the timing and quantities recommended by the chemical supplier .1 Test as required to prevent over-treatment.

.3 In the absence of specific equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, meet the following: Parameter Acceptable Range Acidity Level 7-8.5 pH Conductivity < 800 µS/cm at 25C (< 512 ppm TDS) Chlorides < 150 mg/l Other Components < 1 mg/l Water Hardness 0.1-0.5 mmol/l (10-50 ppm)

3.5 WATER TREATMENT SERVICES .1 Provide water treatment monitoring and consulting services for period of one year after system start-

up. Service to include: .1 Initial water analysis and treatment recommendations. .2 System start-up assistance. .3 Operating staff training. .4 Visit plant as required until system stabilizes, adjust water treatment as needed and advise on

treatment system performance. .5 Provide necessary recording charts and log sheets for one year operation. .6 Provide necessary laboratory and technical assistance.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Start-up:

.1 Start up water treatment systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Commissioning:

.1 Timing: .1 After start-up deficiencies rectified. .2 After start-up and before TAB of connected systems.

.2 Pre-commissioning Inspections: verify: .1 Presence of test equipment, reagents, chemicals, details of specific tests performed, and

operating instructions. .2 Suitability of log book. .3 Currency and accuracy of initial water analysis. .4 Required quality of treated water.

.3 Commissioning procedures - applicable to Water Treatment Systems: .1 Establish, adjust as necessary and record automatic controls and chemical feed rates. .2 Monitor performance continuously during commissioning of connected systems and until

acceptance of project. .3 Establish test intervals, regeneration intervals. .4 Record on approved report forms commissioning procedures, test procedures, dates,

times, quantities of chemicals added, raw water analysis, treated water analysis, test results, instrument readings, adjustments made, results obtained.

.5 Establish, monitor and adjust automatic controls and chemical feed rates as necessary.

.6 Visit project at specified intervals after commissioning is satisfactorily completed to verify that performance remains as set during commissioning (more often as required until system stabilizes at required level of performance).

.7 Provide initial water treatment and startup results to Engineer. .4 Commissioning procedures - Closed Circuit Hydronic Systems:

.1 Analyze water in system.

.2 Based upon an assumed rate of loss, establish rate of chemical feed.

.3 Record types, quantities of chemicals applied.

END OF 15188


15190 – Natural Gas Piping

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

1.2 REFERENCES .1 API 1104-[1974], Standard for Welding Pipeline and Related Facilities. .2 API 5L-[1975], Specification for line pipe. .3 API 68-[1974], Specification for pipeline valves. .4 CSA W47.1-[1983], Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA W47.1S1-[M1989], Supplement No.1-M1989 to W47.1-1983 Certification of Companies for

Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .6 CSA W178.2-[1990], Certification of Welding Inspectors. .7 CSA W48.1-[M1991], Carbon Steel Covered Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. .8 ANSI/ASME B16.11-[1991], Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. .9 ASTM A48-[83(1990)], Specification for Gray Iron Castings. .10 ASTM A181/A181M-[87], Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General Purpose Piping. .11 ASTM A193/A193M-[90], Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for

High-Temperature Service. .12 ASTM A194/A194M-[90], Specification for Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and

High Temperature Service. .13 ASTM A216/A216M-[89], Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon suitable For Fusion Welding for

High-Temperature Service. .14 ASTM D2310-[80(1986)], Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe. .15 ASTM D2517-[81(1987)], Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings. .16 ASTM D2996-[88], Specification for Filament-Wound, "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber Reinforced

Thermosetting Resin) Pipe.

1.3 WELDERS .1 Welders to be certified in accordance with API 1104 and CSA W47.1 and CSA W47.1S1.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Submit record drawings in accordance with Section 15010. .2 Indicate following:

.1 Pipe network plan.

.2 Connections at distribution points.

.3 Type and location of valves, strainers, disconnect and pipe couplings.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPING .1 Pipe: to API 5L, schedule 40. .2 Fittings, 2-1/2” or larger: welded type, carbon steel, seamless or resistance weld. Wall thickness to be

same as corresponding pipe size. .3 Fittings, 2” or smaller: screw type, carbon steel, with appropriate thread compound. Wall thickness to

be same as corresponding pipe size. .4 Aboveground Joints:

.1 Threaded, 2” or smaller: threaded joints using appropriate compound for product being handled.

.2 Welded, 2-1/2” or larger: conform to provincial, federal and municipal regulations or requirements of CSA W47.1 and CSA W47.1S1.

.5 Corrosion and product protection: .1 Protect piping against external corrosion by painting.

2.2 VALVES .1 Steel without copper bearing alloy: to API 68. Class 150, 1 MPa. .2 NPS 1 1/2 and smaller: Use ball valves with teflon seat.


.3 Gate valves NPS 2 and larger: to ASTM A216/A216M, Grade WCB, carbon steel, OS&Y, flanged ends.

.4 Plug valves socket weld or flanged ends: Class 300, 2 MPa, bolted bonnet, tapered plug and seat, carbon steel body and trim with plug, teflon lining.

.5 Glands and valve seats: materials resistant to conveyed fluid.

.6 Rising stem or other indicating valves: where necessary, to establish visually whether valves are open or shut.

2.3 PRESSURE REGULATOR .1 Constant pressure type, ductile iron, with ss trim. .2 Size and capacity: Pressure range 0 to 20”w.g., set according to manufacturer’s recommendations for

each appliance. .3 Natural gas will be supplied to each appliance between 6”w.g. and 7”w.g. pressure. .2 Vented as required by local gas code.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 ANCHORS AND GUIDES .1 Install anchors and guides at following points:

.1 At changes of pipe sizes.

.2 At branch line take offs.

.3 At changes of piping directions.

.4 At all terminal points.

.5 Elsewhere as indicated.

3.2 SUPPORTS .1 Above-ground piping: prevent excessive vibration and stress on adjacent equipment.

3.3 SLEEVES .1 Install where pipes pass through walls or floors. Firestop around pipes.

3.4 LOCATION OF PIPEWORK .1 General: locate so that it will not constitute hazard to personnel, buildings or equipment. .2 Combustible liquids or gases pipework:

.1 Do not install in service tunnels or pedestrian traffic areas.

.2 Locate above-ground where it enters building. Provide with outside control valves at point of entry.

.3 Install underground piping in channels and suitably covered to permit access. Alternatively, the piping shall be encased in ducts so that there is free air space around the pipe that is ventilated.

3.5 INDOOR INSTALLATION .1 Install to approval of authority having jurisdiction. .2 Take most direct route possible or practicable. .3 Support overhead or locate in trenches which contain no other services. .4 Install overhead piping close to ceiling or beams or along walls, where possible. Support from building

structure at least 1800 mm from floor. .5 Steel frame buildings: use bolted clips or pipe hangers attached to flanges with retaining strap. .6 Concrete ceilings: use through bolts or poured-in-place expansion shields. .7 Hanger spacing:

.1 As indicated in Section 15010.

.2 Design to prevent lateral movement. .8 Exposed risers: protect against mechanical damage by installing:

.1 Adjacent to walls or pilasters.

.2 Between flanges of steel columns.

.3 Guards. .9 Install loops or swing connections to compensate for pipe movement. .10 Do not jeopardize fireproofing of any structural elements or fire separations.


3.6 VALVES .1 Install valves to control flow and to isolate equipment at following locations:

.1 All loading and unloading connections;

.2 Each branch line at point of connection to main line;

.3 Install and isolation valve prior to the location that the piping is concealed.

3.7 WELDING .1 Do work in accordance with API 1104. Use oxyacetylene process. .2 Make joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .3 Use bevelling machine to produce bevel cuts. .4 Welds: full penetration. Use welding sockets for joints NPS 2 or smaller, conforming to ANSI/ASME

B16.11. .5 Make branch connections with welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. .6 Replace welds which fail to meet API 1104 requirements.

3.8 TESTING .1 Prior to testing, remove foreign matter, flush piping and equipment using compressed air. .2 Pressure test with air to at least 1.5 times maximum operating pressure. Submit certificate of tests

and test results to Ecosystem. .3 Test piping systems with compressed air to 700 kPa. Hold pressure for 24 h. .4 Should there be loss of pressure, soap test each weld and screw connection or use tracer gas with

compressed air. .5 Repeat repair and testing until system tightness is established and pressure test is successful.

END OF 15190


15510 – Hot Water Boilers

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .1 Includes the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all

auxiliaries, ready for Owner’s use.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/Z223.1 (NFPA 54) - National Fuel Gas Code .2 Ontario Building Code .3 Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code .4 Ontario Ministry of Labour .5 Canadian Standards Association .6 Local Electrical Authority .7 Ontario Regulation 546/96 .8 CAN/CGA-B149.1, Natural Gas Installation Code .9 CSA B51, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code .10 CAN1-3.1, Industrial and Commercial Gas-Fired Packaged Boilers. .11 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV .12 Ontario Gas Utilization Code .13 All other Codes, Standards, and Regulations referred to in the above documents, adopted by the

authorities having jurisdiction and/or applicable to the work of this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights, required clearances, location

and size of field connections. .2 Submit product data indicating capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical

requirements, and wiring diagram. .3 Submit schedule of equipment typically indicating sizes and number of units, including capacity data. .4 Submit Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation

instructions. .5 Indicate general arrangement showing terminal points and instrumentation test connections, including:

.1 Clearances for operation, maintenance, servicing, tube cleaning, tube or heat exchanger replacement.

.2 Foundations with loadings and anchor bolt arrangements.

.3 Piping hook-ups.

.4 Equipment electrical drawings.

.5 Burners and controls.

.6 All miscellaneous equipment.

.7 Flame safety control system.

.8 Engineering data to include combustion efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of design capacity.

.9 Radiant heat loss at 100% design capacity. .6 After startup, submit a startup report from the boiler supplier as detailed later in this Section.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual. .2 Provide the following where relevant for the boiler model(s) supplied

.1 Special tools for burners, manholes, handholes and operation and maintenance.

.2 Spare parts for one year of operation under the warranty.

.3 Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions and maintenance instructions.

1.5 WARRANTY .1 Provide a one-year parts and labor warranty on all components. .2 Provide a 3-year prorated manufacturer’s parts only warranty on the burner.


2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 STAINLESS STEEL CONDENSING HOT WATER BOILER .1 Furnish and install factory "packaged" low pressure condensing hot water boiler with integral burner. .2 Each factory "packaged" boiler shall be complete with all components, accessories and

appurtenances necessary for a complete and operable boiler as hereinafter specified. .3 Each unit shall be furnished factory assembled with required wiring and piping as a self-contained unit. .4 Each unit shall be readily transported and ready for installation. .5 Each factory "packaged" boiler, including pressure vessel, trim, valve trains, burner, control system,

and all related components, accessories and appurtenances as herein specified shall all be assembled and furnished by the boiler manufacturer. The boiler manufacturer shall provide unit responsibility for the engineering, coordination, workmanship, performance, warranties, and all field services for each factory "packaged" boiler as specified herein. The boiler manufacturer shall be fully responsible for all components assembled and furnished by him whether or not they are of his own manufacture.

.6 The boiler shall be equipped with; a temperature/pressure gauge, high limit temperature control certified to UL353, ASME certified pressure relief valve, outlet water temperature sensor, return water temperature sensor, a UL 353 certified flue temperature sensor, outdoor air sensor, low water flow protection and built-in adjustable freeze protection.

.7 Each hot water boiler shall consist of a stainless steel heat exchanger complete with trim, valve trains, variable speed blower motor, burner, and boiler control system. The boiler manufacturer shall fully coordinate the boiler as to the interaction of its elements with the burner and the boiler control system in order to provide the required capacities, efficiencies, and performance as specified.

.8 The heat exchanger shall be sealed and completely enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a proper seal.

.9 All boiler pressure parts shall be constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, and shall be so stamped.

.10 Boiler heat exchanger headers shall be fabricated steel and be completely removable for inspection. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or “O” rings in the header configuration.

.11 Boiler shall be enclosed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-painted on both sides. The composite structure of the boiler combustion chamber, insulating air gap and outer casing shall be of such thickness and materials to assure an outer casing temperature of not more than 50°F above ambient temperature when the boiler is operated at full rated load.

.12 An observation port shall be located on the boiler to allow for observation of the burner flame.

.13 A flue gas outlet shall be located on the rear of the boiler. Boiler to be certified for installation with Category IV venting (stack) as defined in NFPA 54 (ANSI Z221), latest edition. Contractor must provide venting (stack) certified for installation on a Category IV appliance.

.14 Acceptable manufacturers: Lochinvar Knight, Camus DynaMax, Burnham Alpine.

2.2. PERFORMANCE .1 Capable of operating continuously at rated capacity while maintaining a CSA certified efficiency of not

less than 93 % at full fire and up to 98% with return water temperatures at 100°F or below. .2 Burner turndown ratio shall be a minimum of 5:1.

2.3 EMISSION STANDARDS .1 Rate of discharge of air contaminants from boiler not to exceed:

.1 For nitrogen oxides expressed as nitrogen dioxide: .1 30 ppm or less corrected to 3% O2.

2.4 ELECTRICAL .1 Power: as indicated .2 Electrical Components CSA approved.

2.5 CONTROLS .1 Integrated on-board master boiler controller capable of providing full supervisory control of up to 7

additional slave boilers. .2 Factory wired. Enclosed in NEMA/EEMAC 1 steel cabinet. .3 Electronic control interface by touch screen.


.4 Master control features .1 Outdoor reset with linearly calculated curve with adjustable endpoints. .2 Time of day setback to offset outdoor reset curve. .3 Master and slave lead-standby rotation to equalize boiler runtimes. .4 Staging and modulation control of all connected boilers. Control selectable between first-on,

last-off and first-on, first-off. .5 Warm weather shutdown. .6 Boiler circulating pump control relay. .7 Password protected advanced features.

.1 Review of control lockouts, failure, and alarm notices

.2 Review instantaneous system data and stored trend and totalization data. .8 Auxiliary sensing elements.

.1 Outdoor air temperature sensor. .1 thermistor or Pt-1000 RTD type. The sensor shall have an end to end accuracy of

not less than +/- 0.5°C. .2 Outside sensors shall be fastened securely to a north or northwest-facing wall. .3 They shall be shielded for protection from the weather in such a way that good airflow

over the sensing element is assured. They shall be mounted away from exhaust air openings, flues, chimneys, or any other source of heat or cold.

.2 Primary system control sensor .1 The sensor shall be of the thermistor of Pt—1000 RTD type. .2 Water temperature sensors shall be capable of functioning in a well insertion and

have an end to end accuracy of not less than +/- .5 ºC .3 Installed in thermal well.

.5 Slave control features .1 Relay input for boiler enable/disable .2 Staging and Modulation control .3 For modulating burners, 0-10vdc or 4-20ma input. Signal shall be configurable for either direct

burner firing rate or as scaled temperature setpoint. .6 Additional low-level boiler control features.

.1 Semi-automatic sequencing of the burner system through Initiation, Standby, Purge, Pilot Flame Establishing Period, Main Flame Establishing Period and Run.

.2 Flame proving and lockout on flame failure during pilot flame proving, main flame proving, or run.

.3 Low fire firing rate motor position for flame ignition trials.

.4 Modulating switching control of fuel and combustion air.

.5 Status light emitting diodes (LED) indicating: Power present Pilot valve Flame Main valve Alarm

.6 NEMA 1 rated enclosure.

.7 Line voltage terminal inputs for lockout, preignition and recycle limits and interlocks.

.8 Separate annunciation faults including Semi-automatic Control, flame failure, preignition interlocks, lockout interlocks, and firing rate interlocks.

.9 Self-test for proper operation.

.10 Monitor system circuit status.

.11 Tamper resistant safety logic and timing.

.12 Nonvolatile lockup and history files.

.13 Dynamic flame amplification protection.

.14 Characterization to the applied burner.

.15 Run/Test switch to pause the burner sequence in prepurge and pilot ignition trials to support startup testing and burner adjustments.

.16 High fire firing rate motor position for purge trials.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 AUXILIARIES


.1 Provide for each boiler and to meet ANSI/ASME requirements: .1 Relief valves: ANSI/ASME rated, set as indicated or as appropriate for system pressure, to

release entire boiler capacity, piped to floor drain. .2 Pressure gauges: minimum 90 mm diameter complete with shut-off cock. .3 Thermometers: 115 mm diameter range 10 to 120 °C. .4 Pressure gauges and thermometers shall be installed in both supply and return connections.

Provide tri-dicators in lieu of separate pressure and temperature gauges. .5 Low-water cut-off with visual and audible alarms, interlocked to burner control. .6 Isolating ball or rising stem gate valves: supply and return connections. .7 Drain valve, piped to floor drain. .8 For low water volume boilers, flow switch with visual alarm, interlocked to burner control.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Section IV, regulations of

Province having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise, and manufacturers recommendations. .2 Contractor shall receive curbside delivery of boilers, coordinated with boiler supplier. .3 Make all required piping connections to all inlets and outlets recommended by boiler manufacturer. .4 Maintain clearances as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for operation,

servicing and maintenance without disruption of operation of any other equipment or system. .5 Install in a sealed combustion manner with ducted combustion air as indicated. .6 Pipe hot water relief valves full size to nearest drain. .7 Natural gas fired installations - in accordance with CAN/CGA-B149.1. .8 Coordinate control interface with external control systems and equipment.

3.3 MOUNTING AND ACCESSORIES .1 Safety valves and relief valves:

.1 Run separate discharge from each valve.

.2 Terminate discharge pipe as indicated.

.3 Run drain pipe from each valve outlet and drip pan elbow to above nearest drain. .2 Structural steel base, lifting lugs. .3 Install boiler on 4” (100 mm) concrete pads with chamferred corners and edges, sized to exceed

maximum exterior dimensions of boiler by 4” on all sides. .1 Bolt boiler securely to concrete pad. .2 Mount unit level on rubber isolation pads at four corners, minimum ¼" deflection.

3.4 START-UP .1 Start-up, adjustments, and performance tests shall be completed by factory service technician. .2 Provide Engineer at least 24 hours notice prior to inspections, tests, and demonstrations. Submit

written report of inspections and test results. .3 Contractor may use boilers for test purposes prior to acceptance and commencement of warranty

period. .4 Contractor shall arrange with boiler Supplier for labour, materials and instruments required for tests. .5 Contractor shall arrange and pay Supplier to supervise installation, perform start-up adjustments and

check electrical wiring. Contractor shall also provide two follow-up service visits. .6 Contractor shall provide a letter from the Supplier stating boiler control check out has been completed,

burners have been adjusted, barometric dampers have been adjusted, and systems are operating in accordance with specified requirements, c/w written report of inspections and test results. The written report shall include the following at a minimum. Incomplete reports will not be accepted and will require that the startup adjustment and testing is repeated until complete reports are provided. .1 Installation address, startup date, and startup contact information. .2 Startup technician license number. .3 Boiler model and serial number .4 Burner model and serial number .5 Relief valve model, size, and pressure setting .6 Inlet, gas train, and manifold gas pressures for both low and high fire. .7 Input gas firing rate (MBH) for both low and high fire. .8 CO2, O2, and CO percentages in flue gas for both low and high fire (min and max fire for

modulating burners).


.9 Stack temperature, combustion efficiency, and leaving water temperature at both low and high fire (min and max fire for modulating burners).

.10 Date- and time-stamped printouts from the flue gas analyzer used. Handwritten values alone will not be accepted.

.11 Confirmation of safety controls: high limit, high limit manual reset, operating control, modulation control, flow switch, low water cutoff, low gas pressure, high gas pressure, combustion air flow.

.12 Confirmation that internal operating controls have been set up to interface and operate correctly with external controls included in the Work or in other concurrent projects.

.7 Supplier shall demonstrate correct boiler operation to Owner’s Representative.

3.5 TEMPORARY USE BY CONTRACTOR .1 Contractor may use boilers only after written approval from Owner's Representative. .2 Contractor must monitor and record performance continuously. A log of maintenance activities must

be kept. .3 Contractor must refurbish to as-new condition before final inspection and acceptance.

END OF 15510


15551 – Breeching, Flues, and Chimney Liners

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 All products furnished under this Section shall conform to the requirements of The National Fuel Gas

Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA-54 where applicable and shall comply with and be listed to UL 1738, the U.S. Standard for Venting Systems for Gas-Burning Appliances, Category II, III, and IV and ULC-S636-95, the Canadian Standard for Type BH gas vent systems. Components coming in direct contact with products of combustion shall carry the appropriate UL or cUL labels.

.2 Whether drawings indicate natural draft or pressurized flue, flue vents shall be designed to withstand corrosive effects of flue gas condensation.

.3 Seal all joints to prevent condensate leakage.

.4 Make provision for draining flue condensate to a floor drain.

1.2 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit product data and shop drawings for prefabricated sections and connection methods. .2 Submit catalogued or published ratings, obtained from tests carried out by independent testing agency

or manufacturer signifying adherence to codes and standards. .3 Submit vent connector and common vent sizing calculations from a reputable flue supplier. .4 Submittals shall clearly indicate following:

.1 Methods of sealing sections.

.2 Methods of mechanical connection of sections.

.3 Details of thimbles.

.4 Bases/Foundations.

.5 Supports.

.6 Guy details.

.7 Rain caps.

.8 Calculations or computer printouts in support of vent sizing.

.9 Copy of product warranties.

1.3 WARRANTIES .1 The manufacturer shall warrant the Positive Pressure Vent System against defects in material and

workmanship for a period of 15 years from the date of the original installation. Any portion of the vent repaired or replaced under the warranty shall be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 POSITIVE OR NEUTRAL PRESSURE VENT, SINGLE WALL .1. The vent shall be of the PVC schedule 40 single wall, factory-built type, designed for use in

conjunction with Category II, III, or IV condensing or non-condensing gas fired appliances or as specified by the heating equipment manufacturer.

.2 Maximum continuous flue gas temperature shall not exceed 550 degrees F (288 degrees C).

.3 Vent shall be listed for a maximum positive pressure rating of 6” w.c. and shall have passed at 15” w.c.

.4 The vent system shall be continuous from the appliance’s flue outlet to the vent termination outside the building. All systems components shall be UL/cUL listed and supplied by the same manufacturer.

.5 The vent shall be constructed from CPVC.

.6 All systems components such as vent supports, roof or wall penetrations, terminations, appliance connectors and drain fittings required to install the vent system shall be UL listed and provided by the vent manufacturer.

.7 All systems components shall include a factory-installed gasket to render the vent air and water tight when the male/female ends are pushed together as per manufacturer’s instructions, or shall be sealed on site using a manufacturer-approved field-installed sealant.

.8 All systems components shall include a factory installed, internal mechanical locking band for fastening and securing all vent components against each other.

.9 Vent layout shall be designed and installed in compliance with manufacturers installation instructions and all applicable local codes.


2.4 ACCESSORIES .1 Cleanouts: bolted, gasketted type, full size of breeching, where indicated. .2 Hangers and supports: in accordance with recommendations of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA). .3 Rain cap. .4 Expansion sleeves with heat resistant caulking, held in place according to flue manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL .1 Follow manufacturer's and SMACNA installation recommendations for shop fabricated components. .2 Suspend flue pipes at 1.5 m centres and at each joint. .3 Support chimneys at bottom, roof and intermediate levels. .4 Route vent system to maintain minimum clearance to combustibles as specified by the manufacturer. .5 Vent Installation shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions, its UL listing and

state/provincial/local codes .6 Inspect and clean the vent system and breechings before the final connection to the appliances. .7 If dampers or fans are installed in conjunction of the vent system, such equipment shall be supported

independently from the vent system. Protect vent system from twisting or movement due to fan torque or vibration.

.8 Install thimbles where penetrating roof, floor, ceiling and where flue enters masonry chimney. Pack annular space with heat resistant caulking.

.9 Install cone flashings on chimneys at roof penetrations.

.10 Seal flashings to surrounding roof around chimney pentrations to match surrounding.

.11 Install rain caps and cleanouts, as indicated.

.12 Provide a drip leg on the low point of the breeching at the back of each boiler, c/w 1” corrosion-resistant line to floor drain and full-port ball isolation valve.

.13 Provide counter flashing from chimney to curb where chimneys pass through existing and new openings in roof. Flashing to be constructed from 316 Stainless Steel.

END OF 15551


15762 – Finned Tube Radiation Heaters

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Section Includes:

.1 Base board and finned tube radiation, and cabinet convectors including installation. .2 Related Sections:

.1 15080 – Cutting and Patching

.2 15101 – Installation of Pipework

.3 15915 – Electric Controls

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). .2 Hydronic Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR)


.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Indicate:

.1 Equipment, capacity, piping, and connections.

.2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.

.3 Special enclosures.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Packing, shipping, handling, and unloading:

.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for recycling and dispose of in a safe and legal manner.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 DAMPERS .1 Factory built, internal damper, at enclosure air outlet grille for each convection type heating unit not

thermostatically controlled. Refer to schedules on drawings

2.2 CAPACITY .1 As indicated, based on 160°F (71°C) average water temperature, 15°F (8.3°C) temperature drop and

65°F (18°C) at entering air temperature.

2.3 BASEBOARD RADIATION .1 Heating elements: copper tubing, size as indicated, mechanically expanded into flanged collars of

evenly spaced 0.020” aluminum fins. .2 Enclosure

.1 Minimum 1.6 mm thick steel prefinished in factory applied baked enamel from standard colours.

.2 Front panel removable. Run wall to wall, or finish ends with die formed end caps unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Provide joiner pieces where indicated.

.4 Assemble with stainless steel no.10 sheet metal screws.

.5 Enclosure style: as indicated.


.3 Element brackets .1 Ball bearing cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal movement on enclosure brackets. .2 Die-formed channel of heavy gauge steel. .3 Space brackets 900 mm centres maximum or in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. .4 Provide for noiseless expansion of components.

2.4 CABINET CONVECTORS .1 Heating element: seamless copper tubing 3/8” mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly

spaced aluminum fins 0.01” and cast iron headers, steel side plates and supports. .2 Cabinet: type as indicated, 1.6 mm thick steel back and ends, exposed corners rounded, secured

removable front panel, braced and reinforced for stiffness. Provide access doors for valves and vents. Finish cabinet with factory applied baked primer coat from standard colour offerings.

.3 Provide joiner pieces to match unit cabinet cover construction and finish. Assemble with stainless steel no.10 sheet metal screws.

.4 Catalogue rating: certified IBR ratings.

.5 Fasteners: concealed, tamper-proof.

2.5 CABINET UNIT HEATERS .1 Heating element: seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly

spaced aluminum fins and cast iron headers, steel side plates and supports. .2 Cabinet: type as indicated, 1.6 mm thick steel back and ends, exposed corners rounded, secured

removable front panel, braced and reinforced for stiffness. Provide access doors for valves and vents. Finish cabinet with factory applied baked primer coat of standard colour.

.3 Provided with wall seal for recessed wall or ceiling installations.

.4 Catalogue rating: certified IBR ratings.

.5 Fan: forward curved with galvanized housing, with 1” throwaway filters.

.6 Electrical: .1 CSA certified. .2 120/1/60 service, with safety disconnect. .3 Amperage as indicated.

.7 Control .1 Integral thermostat with high-low adjustment. .2 Solid state manual fan speed adjustment. .3 Return water aquastat to enable/disable the fan. Adjustable from 100-240°F.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical

bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Install in accordance with piping layout and reviewed shop drawings. .3 Provide for pipe movement during normal operation. .4 Maintain sufficient clearance to permit performance of service maintenance. .5 Check final location with Engineer if different from that indicated prior to installation. .6 Valves:

.1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise.

.2 Install isolating valves on inlet and balancing valves as indicated. .7 Venting:

.1 Install screwdriver vent on cabinet convector, terminating flush with surface of cabinet.

.2 Install standard air vent with cock on continuous finned tube radiation. .8 Clean finned tubes and comb straight. .9 Install flexible expansion compensators as indicated.

END OF 15762


15765 – Unit Heaters

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures

1.2 PRODUCT DATA .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Submit product data sheets for unit heaters. Include:

.1 Product characteristics.

.2 Performance criteria.

.3 Mounting methods.

.4 Physical size.

.5 kW rating, voltage, phase.

.6 Cabinet material thicknesses.

.7 Limitations.

.8 Colour and finish.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Indicate:

.1 Equipment, capacity and piping connections.

.2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for unit heaters for incorporation into manual specified in

Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. .2 Collect and separate for disposal the various materials in accordance with local recycling facilities

requirements. .3 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility. .4 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL UNIT HEATERS .1 Acceptable manufacturers:

.1 Reznor

.2 Modine .2 Casing: 1.6 mm thick cold rolled steel, glossed enamel finish, with threaded connections for hanger

rods. .3 Coils: seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to steel headers and with evenly spaced aluminum fins

mechanically bonded to tubing. Hydrostatically rated to 1 MPa (150 psi). .4 Fan: direct drive propeller type, factory balanced, with anti-corrosive finish. .5 Motor: speed as indicated, continuous duty, ball bearing motor with built-in overload protection, and

resilient motor supports. .6 Air outlet: adjustable multi-vane diffuser with finish to match casing. .7 Capacity: as indicated base hot water heating capacity on 82°C (180°F) and 11°C (20°F) temperature

drop. .8 Control room thermostat: electric, line or low voltage are acceptable to suit the application. Electronic

with set point locking device or concealed adjustment knob or button. In publicly accessible areas of the building provide with locking metallic cover with openings for natural ventilation.


3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Provide with piping unions and double swing pipe joints as indicated. .3 Check final location with Engineer if different from that indicated prior to installation.

.1 Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Engineer's directive. .4 Hot water units: for each unit, install isolation valves as indicated on inlet and outlet and a balancing

valve on outlet of each unit. Install drain valve at low point. .1 Install manual air vent at high point.

.5 Steam units: for each unit, install isolation valve on inlet, steam trap assembly on outlet and additional ancillary components as indicated.

.6 Clean finned tubes and comb straight prior to completion.

.7 Provide supplementary suspension steel as required and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

.8 Install thermostats in locations as indicated. Where indication is not provided on the drawings install thermostats on interior walls, out of direct sunlight, away from windows, away from internal sources of heat, and away from the direct path of a diffuser, grille, or intake.

.9 Install in locking metallic, tamperproof covers with openings for ventilation in all publicly accessible areas.

.10 Before acceptance, set discharge patterns and fan speeds to suit requirements.

END OF 15765


15916 – Electric and Electronic Control System for HVAC

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 15510 – Hot Water Boilers .2 15762 – Finned Tube Radiation Heaters .3 15765 – Unit Heaters

1.2 REFERENCES .1 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)


.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. .1 Submit one copy of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material

Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Quality assurance submittals: submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal

Procedures. .1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with

specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:

.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01000 – General Conditions and Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

.2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01000 – General Conditions.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSTAT (LOW VOLTAGE PROGRAMMABLE SETBACK) .1 Low voltage wall thermostat:

.1 For use on 24 V circuit at 1.5 A capacity.

.2 Temperature setting range: 10°C to 35°C.

.3 Provide with control transformer sized to suit the application

.4 Provide with control relay where required and not provided as part of the equipment being controlled.

.5 Control outputs to suit equipment application.

.6 7-day programmable with up to four (4) temperature programs per day.

2.2 THERMOSTAT (HEAVY-DUTY, LINE VOLTAGE) .1 Heavy-duty line voltage thermostat for heating with:

.1 Full load rating: as indicated per equipment requirements at voltage indicated.

.2 Temperature setting range: 10°C to 25°C, with set screw adjustment.

.3 Thermometer range: 10°C to 25°C.

.4 Major and minor markings in 5°C.

.5 Differential temperature fixed at 1.1°C.


2.3 THERMOSTAT GUARDS .1 Thermostat guards: lockable housing with ventilation slots for air circulation to thermostat. .2 Public areas: beige colour, cast aluminum. .3 Staff areas: clear plastic.

2.4 WARM WEATHER SHUTDOWN PUMP CONTROLLER .1 Controller shall enable the pump according to the outside air temperature. .2 When outside air temperature drops below the adjustable outside air temperature threshold, initially

set to 18°C the pump shall be enabled. On a rise in outside air temperature the pump shall shut off 2°C above the threshold setpoint.

.3 Manufacturer: Tekmar or equivalent.

2.5 BOILER CONTROLS .1 Boiler outdoor air temperature reset, master-slave, and lead rotation staging controller must be

provided as integral to the boiler control. Separate external boiler controls will not be accepted. .2 See Section 15510 – Hot Water Boilers for further details.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS .1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product

technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 On outside walls, mount thermostats on bracket or insulated pad 25mm away from exterior wall. .2 Install remote sensing device and capillary tube in metallic conduit. Conduit enclosing capillary tube

must not touch heater or heating cable.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 The Contractor shall demonstrate the specified control actions to the satisfaction of the Owner and

Engineer. .2 Settings shall be adjusted and control actions shall be re-demonstrated at the request of and to the

satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.

3.4 CLEANING .1 Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess

materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. .2 Comply with additional requirements described in Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.

END OF 15916


15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY .1 TAB is used throughout this Section to describe the process, methods and requirements of testing,

adjusting and balancing for HVAC. .2 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL .1 Names of sub-contractor and all personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to engineer

within 30 days of award of contract. Provide documentation confirming qualifications.

1.3 PURPOSE OF TAB .1 Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate qualitative

and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual or simulated loads

.2 Adjust and regulate equipment and systems to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal and emergency loads and operating conditions.

.3 Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating ranges.

1.4 EXCEPTIONS .1 TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of authority having

jurisdiction.

1.5 CO-ORDINATION .1 Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and completion

schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project. .2 Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in

unison with those systems.

1.6 START-UP .1 Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified otherwise. .2 Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 15.

1.7 START OF TAB .1 Notify engineer 7 days prior to start of TAB. .2 Start TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

.1 Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.

.2 Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking.

.3 All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere Division 15.

.4 All provisions for TAB installed and operational.

.5 Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of all mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to: .1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment. .2 Air systems:

.1 Filters in place, clean.

.2 Duct systems clean.

.3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances.

.4 Correct fan rotation.

.5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open.

.6 Coil fins combed, clean.

.7 Access doors, installed, closed.


.8 All outlets installed, volume control dampers open. .3 Liquid systems:

.1 Flushed, filled, vented.

.2 Correct pump rotation.

.3 Strainers in place, baskets clean.

.4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open.

.5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings.

.6 Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.

1.8 APPLICATION TOLERANCES .1 Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:

.1 All other HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5%.

.2 Hydronic systems: plus or minus 10%.

1.9 ACCURACY TOLERANCES .1 Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.

1.10 INSTRUMENTS .1 Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either

applicable system or HVAC system. .2 Calibrate within 3 months of TAB.

1.11 TAB REPORT .1 Format in accordance with NEBB Standard. .2 TAB report to show results in I-P units and to include:

.1 Project record drawings.

.2 System schematics. .3 Submit electronic copy of TAB Report to engineer for verification and approval within 5 business days

of completion of TAB. Provide final TAB Report in Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

1.12 VERIFICATION .1 All reported results subject to verification by engineer. .2 Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 25% of all reported results. .3 Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of the Engineer or Owner. .4 Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Owner.

1.13 SETTINGS .1 After TAB is completed to satisfaction of the Owner, replace drive guards, close all access doors, lock

all devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings. .2 Permanently mark all settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings not to be

eradicated or covered in any way. Use manufacturer’s provided laminated tags.

1.14 STANDARDS AND SCOPE .1 Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of this section or current TAB standards of NEBB. .2 Qualifications: Balancing contractor to be current member in good standing of NEBB. TAB personnel

shall be qualified to standards of NEBB. .3 Quality assurance: Perform TAB under direction of supervisor qualified by NEBB.


3.0 EXECUTION .1 Section not used.

END OF 15950

Efficiency Engineering Inc. Sep-13

16010 – Electrical General Requirements

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Appendix A – Additional Documents. Additional installation Specifications and/or details and product

requirements are included in the Electrical series of drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 The installation shall comply with the latest editions and all amendments of the following codes and

standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur, the higher standards will apply: .1 Ontario Building Code .2 Ontario Fire Code .3 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 – CSA Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, C22.1 .4 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 2 – CSA General Electrical Requirements, C22.2 .5 N.F.P.A. Standards .6 Ontario Electrical Safety Code (Electrical Safety Authority). .7 Local Codes, Standards and Bylaws .8 Ontario Ministry of Environment

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .1 Operating voltages to CAN3-C235. .2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60

Hz within normal operating limits established by the above standard. .1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without

damage to equipment.

2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL .1 Material and equipment to be CSA certified. .2 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies. .3 Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or

aluminum conductors.

3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 and Ontario Electrical Safety Code except

where specified otherwise. .2 Reuse existing branch circuit wiring where the Work allows, where available, and where permitted by

all prevailing codes and standards.

3.2 COORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES .1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as over-current and overload protection, relays and fuses are

installed to required values and settings.

3.3 WIRING .1 All wiring and conduit shall be concealed except in Mechanical Rooms. .2 All wiring and conduit shall be identified with permanent indelible identifying markings, either

numbered or coloured plastic tapes on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

.3 All wiring shall be copper.

.4 All motor wiring shall be stranded conductors.

.5 Wire smaller than #12 gauge shall not be used, except for control systems.

.6 Wire and cable shall be colour coded as follows: .1 Power: Red, Black, Blue – Ungrounded Conductor .2 Equipment Grounding: Green .3 Isolation Grounding: Green / Yellow Stripe

.7 Install wiring to all devices shown on the drawings.

Efficiency Engineering Inc. Sep-13

.8 All wiring shall be sized and installed so that at full load, the voltage drop shall not exceed 3% from the panel to the equipment. Wiring sizes indicated refer to R90 or RW90 cable.

.9 Armoured cable, type AC90, shall be BX, x-link insulation for two, three or four insulated conductors complete with interlocked aluminum armour

3.4 CONDUITS .1 All wiring shall be in conduit or EMT system. .2 All conduit shall have a minimum inside diameter of 13mm. .3 All conduit shall be installed out of the way in traffic areas and parallel to the lines of the building. .4 Flexible conduit may be used only in areas of vibration. Maximum length of flexible conduit or

flexible armoured cable shall be 4 feet. .5 All conduit shall be supported every 4 feet. Supports shall be located at each connector joint. .6 Only wires of similar purpose shall be run in the same conduit. .7 Wiring in unfinished occupied space that is more than 12 feet above the floor shall not require conduit.

3.5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES .1 Pull boxes shall be located at a minimum spacing of 30m. .2 The contractor shall be responsible for getting approval from the Owner or Engineer for locating pull

boxes. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor. .3 All boxes shall be clearly marked as part of the HVAC system. Provide equipment identification,

system voltage and phase. Lettering shall be a minimum 10 mm high.

3.6 SERVICE ADEQUACY .1 The Contractor shall provide electrical service to all new equipment. .2 Extras will not be awarded for failure to determine adequacy of existing electrical service and to make

provision for all necessary electrical components, connections, and installation labour.

3.7 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Adhere to additional requirements identified on the Electrical “E” Series drawings in Appendix A –

Additional Documents that are considered to supersede the Specifications of this Section.

END OF 16010